Menu

Acts 15:24 — Word Study

Depth

N1904Ἐπειδὴ ἠκούσαμεν ὅτι τινὲς ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐξελθόντες ἐτάραξαν ὑμᾶς λόγοις ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν λέγοντες περιτέμνεσθαι καὶ τηρεῖν τὸν νόμον, οἷς οὐ διεστειλάμεθα,

BSAInasmuch asepeidē [since we have heard, been informed] we have heardakouō thathoti sometis [certain individuals, people] fromek usegō went outexerchomai troubledtarassō [troubled, disturbed] yousu by wordslogos [with words, teachings] upsettinganaskeuazō [causing confusion, disturbing] theho mindspsuchē [souls, thoughts] of yousu sayinglegō to be circumcisedperitemnō andkai to keeptēreō theho lawnomos to whomhos, hē notou we had given instructions,diastellō

Word
Listen & take awayActs 15
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 24 is in this chapter.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (diastellō) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Acts 15:24quick helps
In a sentenceThe apostles address the troubling influence of unauthorized teachers who have disturbed the minds of the believers.
Who is speakingThe apostles and elders, writing to the Gentile believers.
Where we areThis verse is part of a letter sent to the church in Antioch, addressing concerns raised by false teachings.
The hard wordἀνασκευάζοντες
Take awayThe church is taking a stand against confusion and false teachings.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subjectτὶς verbἀκούω The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

1 of 23 occurs nowhere else in the New Testament — a word chosen on purpose.

Bars are logarithmic — , the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Acts 15:24

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — The Letter from the Apostlesgenerated

23and sent them with this letter: The apostles and the elders, your brothers, To the brothers among the Gentiles in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia: Greetings.
24It has come to our attention that some went out from us without our authorization and unsettled you, troubling your minds by what they said.
25So we all agreed to choose men to send to you along with our beloved Barnabas and Paul,
26men who have risked their lives for the name of our Lord Jesus Christ.

Acts 15:24 is part of a letter sent by the apostles and elders to the Gentile believers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. They address the confusion caused by certain individuals who claimed authority to teach contrary to the apostles' instructions. The letter reassures the believers that these teachings were not authorized by the church leaders, emphasizing the importance of maintaining the integrity of the gospel message.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Jeremiah 23:16This is what the LORD of Hosts says: “Do not listen to the words of the prophets who prophesy to you. They are filling you with false hopes. They speak visions from their own minds, not from the mouth of the LORD.
2Galatians 2:4This issue arose because some false brothers had come in under false pretenses to spy on our freedom in Christ Jesus, in order to enslave us.
3Galatians 5:4–12You who are trying to be justified by the law have been severed from Christ; you have fallen away from grace.
42 Timothy 2:14Remind the believers of these things, charging them before God to avoid quarreling over words, which succeeds only in leading the listeners to ruin.
5Titus 1:10–11For many are rebellious and full of empty talk and deception, especially those of the circumcision,

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 9 references, hung on the phrase they belong to


The Key Word ἀνασκευάζοντες, anaskeuazōgenerated

The Greek word ἀνασκευάζω means to upset or disrupt, particularly in a way that causes confusion or disturbance. It is built from the prefix ἀνα- meaning 'up' or 'again' and the root σκεῦος meaning 'vessel' or 'baggage.' This term conveys a strong sense of upheaval, particularly in the context of teaching and belief.

In this verse, it describes how the unauthorized teachers have unsettled the minds of the believers, indicating a serious disruption to their faith and understanding.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The verse is rendered in the Berean Standard Bible as 'It has come to our attention that some went out from us without our authorization and unsettled you, troubling your minds by what they said.' This wording emphasizes the lack of authority behind the troubling teachings.

Other translations, such as the KJV and ASV, use 'troubled' and 'subverting your souls,' which conveys a more intense disruption of the believers' spiritual state. The WEB and YLT also highlight the unsettling nature of the teachings, showing a consensus on the seriousness of the issue.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The main clause is governed by the verb ἠκούσαμεν, we have heard, which introduces the information about the unauthorized teachers. This is followed by a series of phrases that describe the actions taken by these individuals and their effects on the believers.

The structure includes a noun phrase for the subject, a prepositional phrase indicating the origin of the teachers, and multiple clauses that detail the troubling actions and their impact on the minds of the believers.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

ἠκούσαμεν corresponds to the Hebrew word שָׁמַע, meaning 'to hear.' This connection highlights the importance of listening to authoritative voices in matters of faith.

νόμος reflects the Hebrew תּוֹרָה, which signifies law or instruction. This emphasizes the context of the teachings being discussed in the letter.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Acts 15:24 informs the Gentile believers that some individuals have spread false teachings without the apostles' approval, causing confusion and distress. The apostles clarify that they did not authorize these teachings, aiming to restore peace and clarity in the faith community.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What does it mean that some went out from us?

It means that certain individuals left the apostles' group and began teaching ideas that were not authorized by the church leaders, leading to confusion among the believers.

Why is it important that the apostles did not authorize these teachers?

This emphasizes the authority of the apostles in teaching and maintaining the integrity of the gospel, ensuring that the believers follow the true teachings of Christ.

What kind of confusion did these unauthorized teachers cause?

They unsettled the minds of the believers by introducing teachings that contradicted the core message of the gospel, leading to doubt and fear.

How can we ensure we follow the right teachings today?

By grounding ourselves in Scripture, seeking guidance from trusted leaders, and being discerning about teachings that align with the core message of the gospel.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. What teachings have unsettled my faith in the past, and how did I address them?
  2. How can I ensure that I am following teachings that align with the gospel?
  3. In what ways can I support others who may be confused by false teachings?
  4. What steps can I take to deepen my understanding of the true message of Christ?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Several early church Fathers comment on the implications of this verse, particularly in relation to maintaining doctrinal purity and authority.

Clement of AlexandriaThe Stromata Book 4 c. 150–215
For the apostle says, "All other things buy out of the shambles, asking no questions," with the exception of the things mentioned in the Catholic epistle of all the apostles,
Early Church Fathers on Acts 15 →
John ChrysostomAGAINST THE ANOMOEANS 2.4-5 c. 347–407
You have received as your patrimony the desire never to allow the teachings of our faith to degenerate into heresy. What makes this clear? In the time of your ancestors,
Early Church Fathers on Acts 15 →
John ChrysostomHomily on Acts 33 c. 347–407
And mark with what forbearance of all harsh vituperation of those brethren they indite their epistle. "Forasmuch as we have heard, that certain which went out from us have troubled you with words, subverting your souls, saying,
Early Church Fathers on Acts 15 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Acts 15:24 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

Forasmuch as we have heard,.... By the report of Paul and Barnabas, who were sent by the church at Antioch to Jerusalem, to acquaint them with the state of their case: that certain which went out

Read John Gill on Acts 15 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

Forasmuch as we have heard, that certain which went out from us have troubled you with words, subverting your souls, saying, Ye must be circumcised, and keep the law: to whom we gave no such

Read Robert Jamieson on Acts 15 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

Certain which went out from us; for these false apostles were such as came from Judea, , that is, from the church there. It is Satan’ s great policy to divide, that he may rule; he will have at least one share where there is more than one. No such sad divisions as church divisions, when that some of ourselves preach perverse things, as . Have troubled you with words; as if in the professing of Christianity there would be no salvation unless Judaism be embraced, and circumcision admitted. No greater trouble to a considerate mind, than about the concern of salvation, when they say, Where is thy God? Saying, Ye must be circumcised, and keep the law; these they did well put together; for by…

Read Matthew Poole on Acts 15 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

24 Forasmuch as we have heard, that certain which went out from us have troubled you with words, subverting your souls, saying, Ye must be circumcised, and keep the law: to whom we gave no such commandment: Ver. 24. Subverting your souls] ανασκευαζοντες. Pulling down that which had been set up, unravelling that which had been well knit before. The word signifies unvesselling them, unpacking them (as wares packed up in a vat to be sent beyond sea), scattering them, and bringing all into a confusion.

Read John Trapp on Acts 15 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(24) Certain which went out from us.—The reference is obviously to the teachers (their names are wisely and charitably suppressed) who had appeared at Antioch, as in Acts 15:1. St. John, who was present at the Council (Galatians 2:9), and who, though he took no part in the debate, may well have had a share in drawing up the letter, uses a like mode of speech, “They went out from us, but they were not of us” (1 John 2:19). Subverting your souls.—The Greek verb, literally, turning upside down, implies throwing into a state of excitement and agitation. The Gentiles had been “unsettled” by the teaching of the Judaisers. And keep the law.—Assuming the Epistle of St. James to have been already…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Acts 15 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 24. Certain which went out from us] So the persons who produced these doubtful disputations at Antioch, c., had gone out from the apostles at Jerusalem, and were of that Church: persons zealous for the law, and yet, strange to tell, so conscientiously attached to the Gospel that they risked their personal safety by professing it. To whom we gave no such commandment] As, therefore, they went out from that Church, they should have taught nothing which was not owned and taught by it much less should they have taught in opposition to it.

Read AdamClarke on Acts 15 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

24. which went out] These words are not represented in the Greek of some MSS., but they seem to give force to the history. The disturbing teachers had come from Jerusalem, but their want of any authority is contrasted strongly with the commission of Judas and Silas (Acts 15:27). The first men went of themselves, the new messengers were the choice of the church.subverting your souls] In N. T. the verb occurs only here and is not found in the LXX. In classical Greek, it is applied mostly to an entire removal of goods and chattels either by the owners or by a plundering enemy. The devastation wrought in the minds of the Gentile converts through the new teaching is compared to an utter…

Read Cambridge on Acts 15 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

Forasmuch - Since we have heard. That certain - That some, Acts 15:1. Have troubled you with words - With doctrines. They have disturbed your minds, and produced contentions.

Read Albert Barnes on Acts 15 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

It has come to our attention that some went out from us without our authorization and unsettled you, troubling your minds by what they said.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

Because we have heard that some who went out from us have troubled you with words, unsettling your souls, saying, ‘You must be circumcised and keep the law,’ to whom we gave no commandment;

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

It has come to our attention that some went out from us without our authorization and unsettled you, troubling your minds by saying that you must be circumcised and keep the law.

NETBNew English Translation2006

Since we have heard that some have gone out from among us with no orders from us and have confused you, upsetting your minds by what they said,

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

Forasmuch as we have heard, that certain which went out from us have troubled you with words, subverting your souls, saying, Ye must be circumcised, and keep the law: to whom we gave no such commandment:

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

Forasmuch as we have heard that certain who went out from us have troubled you with words, subverting your souls; to whom we gave no commandment;

RVARevised Version, American1894

Forasmuch as we have heard that certain which went out from us have troubled you with words, subverting your souls; to whom we gave no commandment;

NWBWebster's Bible1833

Forasmuch as we have heard, that certain who went out from us, have troubled you with words, subverting your souls, saying, Ye must be circumcised, and keep the law; to whom we gave no such commandment:

GNVGeneva Bible1599

Forasmuch as we haue heard, that certaine which went out from vs, haue troubled you with wordes, and cumbred your mindes, saying, Ye must be circumcised and keepe the Lawe: to whom we gaue no such commandement,

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

Inasmuch as we have heard that some who went out from amongst us have troubled you by words, upsetting your souls, [saying that ye must be circumcised and keep the law]; to whom we gave no commandment;

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

seeing we have heard that certain having gone forth from us did trouble you with words, subverting your souls, saying to be circumcised and to keep the law, to whom we did give no charge,

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

seeing we have heard that some having gone forth from us troubled you with words, subverting your souls, saying to be circumcised and to keep the Law, to whom we gave no charge,

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

We have heard that certain men have gone out from us, with no orders from us, and have disturbed you with teachings that upset your souls.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

Forasmuch as we have heard, that some going out from us have troubled you with words, subverting your souls; to whom we gave no commandment:

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

We have heard that some from our group have confused you with their teachings, causing you trouble. We certainly didn't tell them to do this!

BBEBible in Basic English1949

Because we have knowledge that some who went from us have been troubling you with their words, putting your souls in doubt; to whom we gave no such order;

Word by word, the decisions they made

ἠκούσαμενakouō we have heard G191 2 different renderings
we have heardASV DBY DRA FBV KJV LSV NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
heardGNV
ἐξελθόντεςexerchomai went out G1831 3 different renderings
went outASV BSB DBY GNV KJV MSB NWB RVA WEB
having gone forthLSV YLT
going outDRA
ἐτάραξανtarassō troubled G5015 3 different renderings
troubledASV DBY DRA GNV KJV LSV NWB RVA WEB
troublingBBE BSB MSB
disturbedULB
λόγοιςlogos by words G3056 5 different renderings
with wordsASV DRA KJV LSV NWB RVA WEB YLT
sayingGNV MSB
teachingsFBV ULB
by wordsDBY
wordsBBE
ψυχὰςpsuchē minds G5590 2 different renderings
soulsASV BBE DBY DRA KJV LSV NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
mindsBSB MSB NETB
περιτέμνεσθαιperitemnō to be circumcised G4059 2 different renderings
be circumcisedDBY GNV KJV MSB NWB WEB
to be circumcisedLSV YLT

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseclauseἘπειδὴInasmuch asclauseverbἠκούσαμενwe have heardclauseὅτιthatclausenoun phrase · subjectτινὲςsomeprepositional phraseἐξfromἡμῶνusverbἐτάραξανtroubledobjectὑμᾶςyouadverbialλόγοιςby wordsclause · adverbialverbἀνασκευάζοντεςupsettingnoun phrase · objectτὰςthenoun phraseψυχὰςmindsὑμῶνof youclauseindirect objectοἷςto whomadverbialοὐnotverbδιεστειλάμεθαwe had given instructionsclauseverbἔδοξενit seemed goodadverbialἡμῖνto usclause · adverbialverbγενομένοιςhaving comeadverbialὁμοθυμαδὸνwith one accordclause · adverbialverbἐκλεξαμένουςhaving chosenobjectἄνδραςmennoun phrase · subjectclauseverbπέμψαιto sendprepositional phrase · adverbialπρὸςtoὑμᾶςyouprepositional phrase · adverbialσὺνwithnoun phrasenoun phrasenoun phraseτοῖςthenoun phraseἀγαπητοῖςbelovedἡμῶνof usnoun phraseΒαρνάβᾳBarnabasκαὶandΠαύλῳPaulnoun phraseἀνθρώποιςmenadjective phraseclauseverbπαραδεδωκόσιhaving handed overnoun phrase · objectτὰςthenoun phraseψυχὰςlivesαὐτῶνof themprepositional phrase · adverbialὑπὲρfornoun phraseτοῦthenoun phraseὀνόματοςnamenoun phrasenoun phraseτοῦof thenoun phraseΚυρίουLordἡμῶνof usnoun phraseἸησοῦJesusΧριστοῦChrist

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Quoniam audivimus quia quidam ex nobis exeuntes, turbaverunt vos verbis, evertentes animas vestras, quibus non mandavimus,

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܫܡܝܥ ܠܢ ܕܐܢܫܝܢ ܡܢܢ ܢܦܩܘ ܘܕܠܚܟܘܢ ܒܡܠܐ ܘܐܗܦܟܘ ܢܦܫܬܟܘܢ ܟܕ ܐܡܪܝܢ ܕܬܗܘܘܢ ܓܙܪܝܢ ܘܢܛܪܝܢ ܢܡܘܣܐ ܐܝܠܝܢ ܕܚܢܢ ܠܐ ܦܩܕܢ ܐܢܘܢ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

Ἐπειδὴ ἠκούσαμεν ὅτι τινὲς ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐξελθόντες ἐτάραξαν ὑμᾶς λόγοις ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν οἷς οὐ διεστειλάμεθα,

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

Ἐπειδὴ ἠκούσαμεν ὅτι τινὲς ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐξελθόντες ἐτάραξαν ὑμᾶς λόγοις ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν οἷς οὐ διεστειλάμεθα,

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

Ἐπειδὴ ἠκούσαμεν ὅτι τινὲς ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐξελθόντες ἐτάραξαν ὑμᾶς λόγοις ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν οἷς οὐ διεστειλάμεθα,

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

Ἐπειδὴ ἠκούσαμεν ὅτι τινὲς ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐτάραξαν ὑμᾶς λόγοις ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν οἷς οὐ διεστειλάμεθα,

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

Ἐπειδὴ ἠκούσαμεν ὅτι τινὲς ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐξελθόντες ἐτάραξαν ὑμᾶς λόγοις ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν οἷς οὐ διεστειλάμεθα,

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

Ἐπειδὴ ἠκούσαμεν ὅτι τινὲς ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐξελθόντες ἐτάραξαν ὑμᾶς λόγοις ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν οἷς οὐ διεστειλάμεθα,

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

Ἐπειδὴ ἠκούσαμεν ὅτι τινὲς ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐξελθόντες ἐτάραξαν ὑμᾶς λόγοις ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν λέγοντες περιτέμνεσθαι καὶ τηρεῖν τὸν νόμον, οἷς οὐ διεστειλάμεθα,

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

Ἐπειδὴ ἠκούσαμεν ὅτι τινὲς ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐξελθόντες ἐτάραξαν ὑμᾶς λόγοις ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν λέγοντες περιτέμνεσθαι καὶ τηρεῖν τὸν νόμον, οἷς οὐ διεστειλάμεθα,

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse they differ
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

WordEditions carrying itMissing from
ἐξελθόντες went outNA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, Treg, TR, ByzWH
λέγοντες sayingTR, ByzNA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn
περιτέμνεσθαι to be circumcisedTR, ByzNA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn
καὶ andTR, ByzNA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn
τηρεῖν to keepTR, ByzNA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn
τὸν theTR, ByzNA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn
νόμον, lawTR, ByzNA28, NA27, SBL, WH, Treg, Tyn

Apparatus — SBL Greek New Testament, CC BY 4.0


The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Acts 15:24ἐπειδήInasmuch asInasmuch asἐπειδήἀκούωwe have heawe have heardἀκούωὅτιthatthatὅτιτὶςsomesomeτὶςἐκfromfromἐκημωνususημωνἐξέρχομαιwent outwent outἐξέρχομαιταράσσωtroubledtroubledταράσσωσύyouyouσύλόγοςby wordsby wordsλόγοςἀνασκευάζωupsettingupsettingἀνασκευάζωthetheψυχήmindsmindsψυχήσύof youof youσύλέγωsayingsayingλέγωπεριτέμνωto be circuto be circumcisπεριτέμνωκαίandandκαίτηρέωto keepto keepτηρέωthetheνόμοςlawlawνόμοςὅςto whomto whomὅςοὐnotnotοὐδιαστέλλωwe had givewe had given inδιαστέλλωἐπείCj. after,Cj. after, for,ἐπείἐκPrep. fromPrep. from out,ἐκλέγωv. I say, v. I say, speakλέγωἀνάPrep. and,Prep. and, apieἀνάπερίPrep. abouPrep. about, coπερίδιάPrep. throPrep. through, διάὅστιςRel.pr. whRel.pr. whosoevὅστιςψύχωv. I cool,v. I cool, growψύχωπνεῦμαn.n. wind,n.n. wind, breaπνεῦμαφημίv. I sayv. I sayφημίφυλάσσωv. I keep,v. I keep, guarφυλάσσωκουστωδίαn.f. a guan.f. a guardκουστωδίαArticle thArticle theοὗAdv where,Adv where, whitοὗμήNeg.prt. nNeg.prt. not, lμήἀμήνHebr. veriHebr. verily, tἀμήνγάρCj. forCj. forγάροὖςn.n. the en.n. the earοὖς
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Acts 15:24

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
Ἐπειδὴepeidē Inasmuch as G1894 Conjunction
10× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Since now refers to a point in time or a cause, as seen in Luke 11:6 and Acts 13:46. This word is used to describe a reason or a time. It appears in various Bible passages to introduce a cause or a time, often indicating a shift in action or thought.
Amplified meaning
since we have heard, been informed
Tyndale gloss
since
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ἐπειδή is a conjunction meaning 'since' or 'when,' used both for temporal and causal contexts. It appears in various New Testament passages, such as Luke 7:1 and Acts 13:46. The word is built from elements meaning 'after' and 'now,' indicating a relationship between events or reasons. While most entries agree on its meanings, some lexicons highlight different nuances in usage.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐπει-δή

conj.;

of time, when now, after that: Lk 7:1 (WH, txt.).

Of cause, seeing that, forasmuch as: Lk 11:6, Ac 13:46 (WH, txt., RV) Ac 14:12 15:24, I Co 1:21, 22 14:16 15:21, Phl 2:26.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐπειδή; Phil. iii. 12, (ἐφ᾽ ᾧ--ὁ σατανᾶς ---οὐκἴσχυσε θανατῶσαι αὐτούς. Theoph. ad Autol. 2, 29 p. 138 ed. Otto ; ἐφ᾽ ᾧ Γεννάδιον ἔγραψεν, for the reason that he had aceused Gennadius, Synes. ep. 73; ef. Hermann ad Vig. p- 710; the better Greeks commonly used ἐφ᾽ ois in the same sense, cf. W. 394 (368) ; [Fritzsche or Mey. on Ro. l. c.; Ellic. on Phil. 1. c.]). Used esp. after verbs signifying a mental affection or emotion, where we also often say over (for exx. fr. Grk. writ. see Passow i. 2, p. 1039; Kriiger § 68, 41, 6; [cf. W.393 (368) c.]): as ἀγαλλιᾶν, Lk. i. 47; χαίρειν. Mt. xviii. 13; Lk. i. 14; xiii. 17; Ro. xvi. 19, ete.; χαρὰ ἔσται, Lk. xv. 7; χαρὰν (Ree. χάριν) ἔχω, Philem. 7; παρακαλεῖν, παρακαλεῖσθαι, 2 Co. i. 4; νὴῖ. 19: 1 Th. iii. 7; κλαίειν, Lk. xix. 41 RG; κοπετὸν ποιεῖν, Acts Vill. 2; κόπτεσθαι. Rev. xviii. 9 [T Tr WH txt. the acc.]; ὀδυνᾶσθαι, Acts xx. 38; ddodvCeww…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐπειδή. For the causal reference of this word, as in Phil 27%, cf. | P Tebt II. 38299 (B.c. 30—a.p. 1) ἐπειδὴ] Κάστωρ .. . παρακεχώρη(κεν) ἀπὸ τῶν λοιπῶν τοῦ κλήρου... . ᾿Ακουσιλάωι γράφομεν ὑμῖν ty’ ἢ ἐπιμε]λὲς KTA., “whereas Castor has ceded the remainder of his holding to Acusilaus, | we write to you in order that you may be careful,” etc., P Oxy VII. 1061? (B.c. 22) ἐπειδὴν καὶ ἄλλοτέ σοι ἐγράWapev. MGr ἐπειδή(ς), “because,” “since.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐπειδή (epeidē) — since.

ἐπεί,

conjunction, both temporal and causal; also ἐπειδή, ἐπείτε. OF TIME (ἐπειδή is more frequently in this sense in Prose), after that, since, when, from [Refs 8th c.BC+]

I. with Ind.,

I.1. of a definite occurrence in past time, mostly with aorist, ἐπεί π᾽ εὔξαντο after they had prayed, [Refs 8th c.BC+]after [Refs 5th c.BC+]: rarely with imperfect, ἐπειδὴ εἱστιώμεθ᾽ [Refs 5th c.BC+]pluperfect, ἐπειδὴ ἐξηπάτησθε.. after you had been deceived.., [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but generally the aorist is found, the pluperfect being used only for special emphasis: with imperfect to express an action not yet complete, ἐπεὶ ὑπηντίαζεν ἡ φάλαγξ καὶ ἡ σάλπιγξ ἐφθέγξατο after the phalanx began to advance and the trumpet had sounded, [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐπειδή

epeide

from 1893 and 1211; since now, i.e. (of time) when, or (of cause)

whereas:--after that, because, for (that, -asmuch as), seeing, since.

see GREEK for 1893

see GREEK for 1211

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐπειδή

Cj.

when, since

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐπειδή epeidē 10x

since, because, in as much as, Mt. 21:46; Lk. 11:6; Acts 13:46

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

az: Conj. and adverb (usually Greek hos hosper, kathos), designating:

(1) Likeness: (a) between nouns (Ge 3:5; Jud 6:5; Php 2:8; Heb 11:27,29); (b) between verbs (Lu 6:36; Joh 5:30; 1Co 10:7); (c) between adjectives (1Co 15:48).

(2) Limitation (with respect to a particular aspect or relation) (1Pe 4:15,16).

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
60%since
since60% · 6×but since10% · 1×because10% · 1×inasmuch as10% · 1×seeing that10% · 1×

10 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 10 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
θεόςGod, a god
Article the
ἙρμῆςHermes
ΠαῦλοςPaul
εὐχαριστίαthankfulness, gratit
σός
ἐπειδήInasmuch as10×
what comes after →
γάρfor
ἐνδιά
πληρόωI fill, fulfill, com
πᾶςall, the whole,
φίλος
ἐγώ
ἀπωθέωI push or thrust awa
αὐτός
αὐτός
εἰμίI am, exist

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐπειδή · 10× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians Acts Luke Philippians
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 16 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome The Didache The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 2c. AD 40

Μωυσῆς δ’ ἑκάτερον ὑπερβάς, τὸ μὲν ὡς ἄσκεπτον καὶ ἀταλαίπωρον καὶ ἀφιλόσοφον, τὸ δ’ ὡς κατεψευσμένον καὶ μεστὸν γοητείας, παγκάλην καὶ σεμνοτάτην ἀρχὴν ἐποιήσατο τῶν νόμων, μήτ’ εὐθὺς ἃ χρὴ πράττειν ἢ τοὐναντίον ὑπειπὼν μήτ’, ἐπειδὴ προτυπῶσαι τὰς…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.7c. AD 75–95

ἀλλʼ ἐπειδὴ μείζων ἦν ἡ τοῦδε τοῦ λόγου περιβολή, κατʼ αὐτὸν ἐκεῖνον χωρίσας ταῖς ἰδίαις ἀρχαῖς αὐτοῦ καὶ τῷ τέλει τὴν γραφὴν συνεμέτρησα·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 7.5c. AD 100

ἐπειδὴ ἐμὲ ὑπὲρ ἁμαρτιῶν μέλλοντα τοῦ λαοῦ μου τοῦ καινοῦ προσφέρειν τὴν σάρκα μου μέλλετε ποτίζειν χολὴν μετὰ ὄξους, φάγετε ὑμεῖς μόνοι, τοῦ λαοῦ νηστεύοντος καὶ κοπτομένου ἐπὶ σάκκου καὶ σποδοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 6th c. AD 7th c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD
P.Cair. Zen. 3 59377Arsinoites276 BC–227 BC

ὑπόμνημα Ζήνωνι παρὰ Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Ἰσμαήλου. ἀξιοῦμέν σε, ἐπειδὴ πέρυσι ἐργασαμένων ἡμῶν ἀρούρας γ 𐅵 συμβαίνει ἡμῖν ἐκεῖνά τε ἐργάσασθαι ἡμᾶς καὶ ἄλλην

P.Cair. Zen. 4 59620Arsinoites (?)249 BC–240 BC

ἀνθρώπους, ἐὰν δὲ μὴ χειρογραφῶσιν, μηθενὶ ἐπιτρέπειν ἀποβιάζεσθαι τὴν Ἀρσινόην. δέομαι οὖν σου, βασιλεῦ, ἐπειδὴ ὁ μὲν φθαρεὶς ὑπὸ τῆς Ἀρσινόης ἀνακεχώρηκεν ἵνα μὴ ἐνδείξηται ὡς ἔστιν αὑτοῦ ἡ

P.Cair. Zen. 3 59368Memphis (?)242 BC

πλοίου ἐπὶ τὸν ὅρμον καὶ τῶν παρʼ αὐτοῦ κωλυσάντων κενὸν ἀπῆλθεν. ἀξιοῦμεν οὖν σε, ἐπειδὴ οὐθʼ ἡμῖν ἐκποιεῖ ἀποδημεῖν οὔτʼ ἐκείνωι ἐνθάδε παραγενέσθαι, γράψαι αὐτῶι ἀποστεῖλαι τοὺς μελισσουργοὺς καὶ

Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
ἠκούσαμενakouō we have heard G191 Verb · aorist · active · indicative · first person · plural
428× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To hear or listen, not just with our ears but also to understand and obey, as Jesus says in Mark 4:3 and Matthew 11:15. It involves paying attention to what is being said and responding accordingly.
Tyndale gloss
to hear
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀκούω, transliterated as akouo, means 'to hear' or 'to listen.' It covers a range of meanings from simply hearing sounds to understanding and obeying what is said. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including commands to listen (e.g., Mk 4:3) and references to understanding (e.g., 1 Cor 14:2). The lexicons do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀκούω,

[in LXX chiefly for שׁמע;]

to hear, listen, attend, perceive by hearing, comprehend by hearing.

Intrans.: Mk 4:3 7:37, Ja 2:5, Re 2:7, al.; τ. ὠσίν, Mt 13:15(LXX); c. cogn. dat., ακοῇ ἀ. (v.s. ἀκοή), Mt 13:14, Ac 28:26(LXX); ὁ ἔχων ὦτα (οὖς) ἀκούειν, ἀκουσάτω, Mt 11:15, Mk 4:23, Re 2:7, al.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀκούω [on the use of the pres. in a pf. sense ef. W. 274 sq. (258); B. 203 (176)]; impf. ἤκουον ; fut. (in best Grk. usage) ἀκούσομαι, Jn. v. 25 RGL, 28 RGL; Acts iii. 22; vii. 37 RG; xvii. 32; [xxi. 22]; xxv. 22; xxviii. 28; [Ro. x. 14 Tdf.], and (a later form) ἀκούσω. Mt. xii. 19; xiii. 14, (both fr. the Sept.) ; [Jn. x. 16; xvi. 13 Tr WH mrg.; Acts xxviii. 26]; Ro. x. 14 ΓΒ 617; and T Tr WH in Jn. v. 25, 28, (ef. W.82 (79); B. 53 (46) [Veitch 5. v.]); [1 aor. ἤκουσα; Jn. iii. 32, ete.]; pf. ἀκήκοα; Pass.,[ pres. ἀκούομαι; 1 fut.axovaOncopar]; 1 aor. ἠκούσθην ; [fr. Hom. down]; tohear. I. absol. 1. tobe endowed with the faculty of hearing (not deaf): Mk. vii. 37; Lk. vii. 22; Mt.xi.5. 2. to attend to (use the faculty of hearing), consider what is or has been said. So in exhortations: ἀκούετε, Mk. iv. 3; ἀκούσατε, Jas. ii. 5; ὁ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν ἀκουέτω, Mt. xi. 15; xiii. 9, [in both T…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀκούω. The verb is of course common enough, and needs little or no illustration, having few peculiarities. Its use for a judicial hearing (as Ac 2523) may be paralleled with P Tand οἷ (ii/A.p.) Kal [pé]x [pr] τούτου οὔπο ἠκούσθ[ημ]εν, and P Oxy VII. 1032 (A.p. 162), where the epistrategus endorses a petition with ἀκουσθήσεται. So in BGU IL. 511i? (= Chrest. 1. p. 26), an account written about A.D. 200 of a trial before Claudius, we have ἀκούει Κλαύδιος Καῖσα[ρ Σέβαστος ᾿Ισιδώρου] γυμνασιάρχου πόλεως ᾿Α[λεξανδρέων] κατὰ ᾿Αγρίππου βασιλέω[ς]. The last example will illustrate ἀκούειν with normal gen. of person: P Par 485 (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski*® p. 91) ἀκούσαντες . . τὰ περὶ σοῦ συνβεβηκότα will serve for accus. vez, and will also illustrate the common use with περί, since the phrase is a mixture of ἀκ. περὶ σοῦ and ἀκ. τά σοι συνβεβηκότα (Witk.).…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀκούω (akouō) — to hear.

ἀκούω:

Epic dialect imperfect ᾰκουον[Refs 8th c.BC+]future ἀκούσομαι (active ἀκούσω first in [NT+4th c.BC+]aorist ἤκουσα, Epic dialect ᾰκουσα[Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect ἀκήκοα, Laconian dialect ἄκουκα[Refs 1st c.AD+]; ἤκουκα is a late form, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; later Ionic dialect ἀκήκουκα[Refs 3rd c.BC+]: pluperfect ἀκηκόειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; old Attic dialect ἠκηκόη[Refs 5th c.BC+] —rare in middle, present (see. below [Refs]: Epic dialect imperfect ἀκούετο[Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist ἠκουσάμην[Refs 2nd c.BC+]:—passive, future ἀκουσθήσομαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἠκούσθην[Refs 5th c.BC+]: perfect ἤκουσμαι[Refs 1st c.BC+]; ἀκήκουσμαι is uncertain in [Refs 2nd c.AD+]: pluperfect ἤκουστο[Refs 4th c.BC+], (παρ-) [Refs 1st c.AD+]:—hear, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: properly with accusative of thing heard, genitive of person from whom it is heard, ταῦτα Καλυψοῦς ἤκουσα[Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀκούω

akouo

a primary verb; to hear (in various senses):--give (in the) audience

(of), come (to the ears), (shall) hear(-er, -ken), be noised, be

reported, understand.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀκούω

v.

I hear, listen

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀκούω akouō 428x

some list the future active as a middle deponent, ἀκούσομαι, to hear; to hearken, listen to, Mk. 4:3; Lk. 19:48; to heed, obey, Mt. 18:15; Acts 4:19; to understand, 1 Cor. 14:2; to take in or admit to mental acceptance, Mk. 4:33; Jn. 8:43, 47

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀκούω Root ΑΚΟϜ to hear, Hom., etc. —Construct., properly, c. acc. of thing heard, gen. of pers. from whom it is heard, ταῦτα Καλυψοῦς ἤκουσα Od.; the gen. pers. may be omitted, ἀκήκοας λόγον Soph., or the acc. rei, ἄκουε τοῦ θανόντος id. Soph.:—often however c. gen. rei, to have hearing of a thing.

c. gen. objecti, to hear of, hear tell of, ἀκ. πατρός Od.; so c. acc., Od.:—so, ἀκ. περί τινος.

the pers. from whom the thing is heard takes a prep., ἀκούειν τι ἀπό, ἔκ, παρά, πρός τινος, Il., attic

to know by hearsay, εἴ που ἀκούεις Od.; so Plat., etc.

absol. to hearken, give ear, to begin a proclamation, ἀκούετε λεώι hear, O people.

to listen to, give ear to, Il.

to obey, c. gen., or more rarely c. dat., id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAI-1P — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · first person · plural
aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAI-1P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: first Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
20%having heard
having heard20% · 88×hearing10% · 45×hear9% · 39×i heard7% · 31×heard6% · 28×you have heard4% · 18×he should hear4% · 16×you hear2% · 9×other renderings37% · 161×

435 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 90 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb89%adverbial11%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 428 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ὁράωI see, look uponαὐτόςβλέπωI look, see
Article the
πᾶςall, the whole, καίand, even, also,εἰμίI am, exist
ὅς
ἀκούωI hear, listenπᾶςall, the whole, λόγοςa word, speech,
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theὅτανwhen, whensoeverὡςas, like as, how
οὖςthe ear
ἔχωI have, hold, poArticle the
ἀκούωwe have heard428×
what comes after →
Article the
λόγοςa word, speech, μαθητήςa learner, disciπερί
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὐNegβλέπωI look, see
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theοὗτοςὅτιthat, since, bec
ὅτιthat, since, because
εἶπονI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
καίand, even, also,πολύςmuch, many, ofteσυζητέωI seek together,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀκούω · 428× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew John Revelation Mark 1 John Hebrews Ephesians Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament23 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 515 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.16c. AD 40

ὅταν οὖν λέγῃ „ἰδεῖν τί καλέσει", ἄκουε ἴσον τῷ, διὰ τί καλέσει καὶ προσκαλέσεται καὶ ἀσπάσεται τούτων ἕκαστον ὁ νοῦς·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.184c. AD 75–95

καὶ ὁ μὲν ταῦτʼ ἀκούσας θυσίαν προσφέρει τῷ θεῷ κελευσθεὶς ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 7.3c. AD 100

ἀκούσατε, πῶς περὶ τούτου πεφανέρωκαν οἱ ἱερεῖς τοῦ ναοῦ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 5th c. AD 7th c. AD 3rd c. AD
P.Lond. 7 2011Pharbaithos (Arsinoites)244 BC

r Παταικίων Ζήνωνι χαίρειν. ἀκηκόαμεν παρὰ Πύρρου τοὺς αἰπόλους ἀναχωρεῖν. τὸν μὲν οὖν Λιμναῖον ἔφη ἤδη ἀπεληλυθέναι, Δημήτριον δὲ

P.Cair. Zen. 3 59368Memphis (?)242 BC

ϛ ἔτους τινὰ δὲ ἐν τῶι Μεμφίτηι, ἃ εἶχεν Παμῆς καὶ Ἀμεννεύς, οὓς νῦν ἀκούομεν μεταγηγοχέναι εἰς τὸν Ἡρακλεοπολίτην ἄνευ ἡμῶν, Ἀμμώνιος δʼ ὁ οἰκονόμος ἀπαγήοχεν αὐτοὺς καὶ τὰ

P.Grenf. 2 36Pathyris96 BC

ἡμῖν κακὸν ἐποίησεν ἀλλʼ ἐκ τῶν ἐναντίων ἐπιμεμέληται, περὶ ὧν, ἐὰν αἱρῆτε, γράψατέ μοι. ἠκούσαμεν τὸν μῦν καταβεβρωκέναι τὸν σπόρον. καλῶς ἡμῖν ὦδε, ἢ ἐν Διοσπόλει ἐὰν αἱρῆσθε, πυρὸν

Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
ὅτιhoti that G3754 Conjunction
1,293× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means 'that' or 'because', used to introduce a reason or explanation. It appears in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 3:9 and Romans 8:38. It helps to show cause and effect in sentences.
Tyndale gloss
that/since: that
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὅτι (hoti) is a conjunction primarily meaning 'that' or 'because.' It introduces objective clauses, often following verbs of perception or declaration, and can also serve as a causal particle. The New Testament frequently employs it in this way, such as in Matthew 5:4-12. There is some variation in how lexicons describe its usage, particularly regarding its pleonastic function in direct discourse.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅτι,

conjc. (prop. neut. of ὅστις).

As conjc, introducing an objective clause, that;

after verbs of seeing, knowing, thinking, saying, feeling: Mt 3:9 6:32 11:25, Mk 3:28, Lk 2:49, Jo 2:22, Ac 4:13, Ro 1:13 8:38 10:9, Phl 4:15, Ja 2:24, al.; elliptically, Jo 6:46, Phl 3:12, al.

After εἶναι (γίνεσθαι): defining a demonstr. or pers. pron., Jo 3:19 16:19, Ro 9:6, I Jo 3:16 al.; c. pron. interrog., Mt 8:27, Mk 4:41,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅτι [properly neut. of ὅστις], a conjunction [fr. Hom. down], (Lat. quod [ef. W. § 53,8 b.; B. § 139, 51; § 149, 87), marking I. the substance or contents (of a statement), that; 1. joined to verbs of saying and declaring (where the ace. and infin. is used in Lat.) : ἀναγγέλλειν, Acts xiv. 27; διηγεῖσθαι, Acts ix. 273; εἰπεῖν, Mt. xvi. 20; xxviii. 7,13; Jn. vii. 42; xvi. 15; 1Co.i.15; λέγειν, Mt. iii. 9; vill. 11; Mk. iii. 28; Lk. xv.7; Jn. xvi. 20; Ro. iv. 9 [T Tr WH om. L br. ὅτι}; ix. 2, and very often; προεἰρηκέναι, 2 Co. vii. 3; before the ὅτι in Acts xiv. 22 supply λέγοντες, contained in the preceding παρακαλοῦντες [ef. B. §151, 11]; ὅτι after γράφειν, 1 Co. ix.10; 1 Jn. 11. 12-14; μαρτυρεῖν, Mt. xxiii. 31; Jn. i. 34; iii. 28; iv. 44; ὁμολογεῖν, Heb. xi. 13; δεικνύειν, Mt. xvi. 21; δηλοῦν, 1 Co. i. 11; διδάσκειν, 1 Co. xi. 14. after ἐμφανίζειν. Heb. xi. 14; δῆλον (ἐστίν), 1 Co.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

οτι. (1) For ὅτι, ‘‘that,” introducing an objective clause after verbs of knowing, saying, etc., cf. P Tebt II. 4098 (A.D. 5) εἰδὼ[ς ὅ]τι ἐξίι)ουσίαν αὐτῶν ἔχει kal Λυσίμαχος kal σύ, ΚΕ knew that both you and Lysimachus had plenty of them” (Edd.), P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) νομίσας ὅτι (cf. Mt 517) κιχρᾷς por αὐτούς, ““ consider that you are lending them (sc. staters) to me’’ (Edd.), BGU III. 8464* (ii/a.p.) (= Selections, p. 93) γεινώσκειν σαι θέλω, ὅτι οὐχ [HA] Lov, ὅτι ἀναβένις (1. ἀναβαίνεις) els τὴν μητρόπολιν, “1 wish you to know that I had no hope that you were coming up to the metropolis,” 74.9 αἴγραψά σοι, ὅτι γυμνός εἰμει, “1 wrote you that I am naked,” and P Tebt II. 420+ (iii/A.D.) οἴδατε ὅτι ἀπὸ ζημίας ἠμί, ‘‘ You know that I am blameless.” Ὅτι, however, is frequently omitted, e.g. BGU IIL. 8153(ii/a.p.) γεινόσκιν σε θέλω [τὴ]ν ἐπιστολήν σου ἔλαβε (corrected by another hand…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅτι (hoti) — that/since: that.

ὅτῐ,

Epic dialect ὅττῐ (both in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: conjunction, to introduce an objective clause, that, after Verbs of seeing or knowing, thinking or saying; in [Refs 8th c.BC+] —Usage:

I. when ὅτι introduces a statement of fact:

I. a in [Refs 8th c.BC+] always with indicative, the tense following the same rules as in English, ἤγγειλ᾽ ὅττι ῥά οἱ πόσις ἔκτοθι μίμνε πυλάων [Refs 8th c.BC+]

I. b in Attic dialect, ὅτι takes indicative after primary tenses, indicative or optative after secondary tenses, e.g. ἐνδείκνυμαι ὅτι οὐκ ἔστι σοφός [Refs 5th c.BC+] news came that Megara had (literal has) revolted, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: sometimes optative and indicative are found in the same sentence, ἔλεγον, ὅτι Κῦρος μὲν τέθνηκεν, Ἀριαῖος δὲ πεφευγὼς.. εἴη [Refs 5th c.BC+].. and the accusative with infinitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅτι

hoti

neuter of 3748 as conjunction; demonstrative, that (sometimes

redundant); causative, because:--as concerning that, as though,

because (that), for (that), how (that), (in) that, though, why.

see GREEK for 3748

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅτι

Cj.

that, since, because

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅτι hoti 1x

originally was the neuter of ὅστις, that, Mt. 2:16, 22, 23; 6:5, 16; often used pleonastically in reciting another’s words, Mt. 9:18; Lk. 19:42; Acts 5:23; as a causal particle, for that, for, because, Mt. 2:18; 5:3, 4, 5; 13:13; because, seeing that, since, Lk. 23:40; Acts 1:17

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%that
that64% · 856×because19% · 252×for16% · 209×other renderings1% · 12×

1,329 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,293 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
σύ
λέγωI say, speakγάρforδέbut, on the othe
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςσύδέbut, on the othe
οἶδαI know, remember
οὐNegκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakμαθητήςa learner, disciπερί
γινώσκωI come to know, lear
οὗτοςκαίand, even, also,αὐτός
ὅτιthat1293×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπατήρfather, Father,
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existοἶδαI know, rememberδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ἐγώ
εἰμίI am, existοὐNegArticle the
οὗτος
εἰμίI am, existArticle theποιέωI do, make
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
Article theῥῆμαa thing spokenζητέωI seek, search f

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅτι · 1,293× in the New Testament
John Luke Matthew Acts Mark 1 John Revelation 1 Corinthians Romans 2 Corinthians Galatians Philippians

2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 8c. AD 40

Μωυσῆς δὲ καὶ φιλοσοφίας ἐπ’ αὐτὴν φθάσας ἀκρότητα καὶ χρησμοῖς τὰ πολλὰ καὶ συνεκτικώτατα τῶν τῆς φύσεως ἀναδιδαχθεὶς ἔγνω δή, ὅτι ἀναγκαιότατόν ἐστιν ἐν τοῖς οὖσι τὸ μὲν εἶναι δραστήριον αἴτιον, τὸ δὲ παθητόν, καὶ ὅτι τὸ μὲν δραστήριον ὁ τῶν ὅλων…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.3c. AD 100

ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
C.Erbstreit14Diospolis Magna (Theben)187 BC

καὶ τὴν εἰκοστὴν τοῦ ἐγκυκλίου καὶ τὰ ἄλλα τὰ καθήκοντα. … ται Προῖτος, καθʼ ὅτι πρόκειται … ἑξήκοντα ἓξ τετρωβόλου καὶ τῆς … … τοπογραμματέως τοῦ Παθυρίτου … ἀρουρῶν

P.Grenf. 1 10 p. 24Hermonthis149 BC

ι τοῖς ἐνκαλουμένοις τὸ ἀντίγραφον τῆς ἐντεύξεως λαβεῖν παρ … τ … … πίστιν ὅτι ἀπαντησα … ἐπὶ τὸ ἐν τῆι αὐλῆι κριτήριον ἐν ἡμέραις λ οὐκ ο

P.Bour. 10Pathyris89 BC

δʼ ἐπιχειροῦντας μὴ ὑπακούειν σου … υτέραι στάσει ἐχομένους ἀσφαλισάμενος μέχρι τοῦ καὶ ἡμᾶς ὅτι τάχος ἐπιβαλεῖν πρὸς σέ. ἔρρωσοἔρρωσο ἔτους κϛ Φαμενὼθ ιϛ

Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
τινὲςtis some G5100 Indefinite pronoun · nominative · plural · masculine
529× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This pronoun refers to a person or thing in a general sense, as seen in Luke 9:49 and John 11:1. It can mean someone, anyone, or anything. This term is often used to describe an unspecified individual or object.
Amplified meaning
certain individuals, people
Tyndale gloss
one
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

τὶς is an enclitic indefinite pronoun meaning 'someone' or 'something.' It can refer to a certain person or object and appears in both singular and plural forms, such as τινός and τινες. The New Testament uses it in various contexts, including Luke 9:49 and Acts 5:25. It is related to the interrogative pronoun τίς, indicating its flexible use in questions and statements.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τις, neut., τι, gen., τινός,

enclitic indefinite pron., related to interrog. τίς as πού, πως, ποτέ to ποῦ, πῶς, πότε.

As subst.,

one, a certain one: Lk 9:49, Jo 11:1, Ac 5:25, al.; pl., τίνες, certain, some: Lk 13:1, Ac 15:1, Ro 3:8, al.

someone, anyone, something, anything: Mt 12:29, Mk 9:30, Lk 8:46, Jo 2:25, Ac 17:25, Ro…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τὶς, τὶ. ἘΣ what follows, εἰ καί lays less emphasis upon it; although it is evident that εἰ καί can often be substituted for καὶ ei.” Cf. Herm. Vig. p. 829 sq.; W. 444 (413); Ellic. on Phil. ii. 17; Schmalfeld, Griech. Syntax, § 41; Paley, Grk. Particles, p. 31]. 8. εἰ μή, a. in a conditional protasis, with the same sequence of moods and tenses as the simple εἰ, see 1. above, if not, unless, except, [W. 477 (444) sqq.; B. 345 (297)]: Mt. xxiv. 22; Jn. ix. 33; | xv. 22, 24; Ro. vii. 7, ete. b. it serves, with the entire. following sentence, to limit or correct what has just been said, only, save that, (Lat. nisi quod), [B. 359 (308) ]: Mk. vi. 5; 1 Co. vii. 17 (where Paul by the addition εἰ μὴ ἑκάστῳ κτλ. strives to prevent any one in applying what had been said a little while before, viz. οὐ δεδούλωται . . ἐν τοιούτοις to his own case, from going too far) ; in ironical answers, unless…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

τις (indef. pron.), ‘* someone, something’’: P Vat ΑἸ (B.c. 168) (= UPZi. p. 303) πᾶς τις πειρᾶται. . ., P Lond 421° (B.C. 168) (= Selections, p. 10) εἰς πᾶν τι ἐληλυθυῖα διὰ, τὴν τοῦ σίτου τιμήν, ‘having come to the last extremity because of the high price of corn,’’ P Oxy IV. 7421° (B.c. 2) ἐάν τι δύνῃ... δὸς ἐργασίαν, “if you can, give your attention to it’’ (Edd.), 2d. I. 120% (iv/a.D.) τινα ὁρῶντα αἱαυτὸν (/. ἑαυτὸν) ἐν δυστυχίᾳ, ““α man finding himself in adversity,’ 13 ἀποστῖλόν pot τινα ἢ Γοῦνθον ἢ ᾿Αμμώνιον, “send someone to me, either Gunthus or Ammonius” (Edd.). P Oxy VI. 937°" (ili/A.D.) γ]ράψον ἐκεῖ TO kat’ εἶδος ὅτι τι kal τι εἴληφας is translated by the editors ‘* write the list there, that you have received so and so.” They 3) ες remark that it is simpler to take τι καί τι as analogous to τὸ καὶ τό than ‘‘to take τί kal τί as an indirect interrogative, ὅτι being…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τις (tis) — one.

τις,

τι, Indef. pronoun any one, any thing, enclitic through all cases (for exceptions see below):—but τί; τί; Interrog. pronoun who? what?, oxytone in the monosyllable cases, paroxytone in the others:—Dialectal forms: [Refs 5th c.AD+] σις (si se) [Refs 4th c.AD+] σις (with ?? for σ) [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Thess. κις [Refs], neuter κι in διεκί, ποκκί (which see); neuter plural Doric dialect σά, Boeotian dialect τά, Aeolic dialect dative τίω, τίοισι (see. infr. B). (I.-[Refs 5th c.BC+] q[uglide]i-, cf. Latin quis, quid, etc.; for σά, τά, see at {ἄσσα}, σά μά; with τέο (see. infr. B) cf. OSlav. genitive česo)

__A Indef. pronoun τις, τι, genitive Ionic dialect τεο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; more frequently τευ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Trag. and Attic dialect του [Refs 5th c.BC+]; του is rare after [NT+4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

τὶς

tis

an enclitic indefinite pronoun; some or any person or object:--a (kind

of), any (man, thing, thing at all), certain (thing), divers, he

(every) man, one (X thing), ought, + partly, some (man, -body, -

thing, -what), (+ that no-)thing, what(-soever), X wherewith,

whom(-soever), whose(-soever).

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τις, τι

Indef.pr.

any one, some one

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τις tis 534x

enclitic, indefinite pronoun, a certain one, someone, Mt. 12:47; pl. some, certain, several, Lk. 8:2; Acts 9:19; 2 Pet. 3:16; one, a person, Mt. 12:29; Lk. 14:8; Jn. 6:50; combined with the name of an individual, one, Mk. 15:21; as it were in a manner, a kind of, Heb. 10:27; Jas. 1:18; any whatever, Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Indef-NPM — Indefinite pronoun · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

X-NPM Part of Speech: indefinite pronoun Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
27%anyone
anyone27% · 144×some19% · 102×certain17% · 93×anything9% · 48×any9% · 47×one6% · 34×someone4% · 19×something3% · 18×other renderings7% · 37×

542 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 35 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject66%object20%adverbial9%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 530 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
εἰCond
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὅτιthat, since, bec
δέbut, on the other ha
εἰCondεἰμίI am, existλέγωI say, speak
ἐάνCond
καίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speakἐγώ
μήNeg
ἵναin order that, sἐάνCondβλέπωI look, see
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςΦαρισαῖοςa Phariseeὁδόςa way, road, jou
τὶςsome529×
what comes after →
Article the
γραμματεύςa scribe, town-cμαθητήςa learner, disciἀπό
σύ
λέγωI say, speakπλανάωI lead astray, dἐρωτάωI ask, question,
αὐτός
ἐκὁράωI see, look uponἀπό
ἐκ
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
εἰμίI am, exist
ἐνπλούσιοςrichὑδρωπικόςafflicted with d

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτὶς · 529× in the New Testament
Acts Luke John 1 Corinthians Mark 2 Corinthians Hebrews Matthew 1 Timothy Romans James Revelation

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 121 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 4c. AD 40

καὶ γὰρ λόγον καὶ ἀκοὴν ὑπερβάλλει μείζω καὶ σεμνότερα ὄντα ἢ ὡς θνητοῦ τινος ὀργάνοις ἐναρμοσθῆναι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.5c. AD 100

πλήρης εἰμὶ ὁλοκαυτωμάτων, καὶ στέαρ ἀρνῶν καὶ αἷμα ταύρων καὶ τράγων οὐ βούλομαι, οὐδ̓ ἂν ἔρχησθε ὀφθῆναί μοι, τίς γὰρ ἐξεζήτησεν ταῦτα ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν ὑμῶν;

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν· μὴ ἐξέστω δὲ τῷ καθόλου ἐπὶ τὴν διαθήκην ταύτην ἄλλῳ τινὶ ἐπέρχεσθαι, εἰ δὲ μὴ ἄκυρον ἔστω καὶ προσαποτεισάτω ὁ ἐπιφέρων ὕστερον … ἄλλον τῆς

P.Cair. Cat. 10364 descr.Pathyris126 BC–102 BC

προγεγραμμένου ἵππου, καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσεσθαί σοι ὑπὲρ αὐτοῦ. ἐὰν δὲ ἐπέλθωμεν ἢ ἄλλος τις ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἥ τʼ ἔφοδος ἄκυρος ἔσται καὶ προσαποτείσομέν σοι χαλκοῦ τάλαντα πέντε.

BGU 6 1260Pathyris102 BC

σημαινομένης ἀρούρης μιᾶς , καὶ μὴ ἐπελεύσασθαι Νεχθανοῦπιν καὶ τοὺς τούτου υἱοὺς μηδʼ ἄλλον τινὰ τῶν παρʼ αὐτῶν ἐπὶ τὸν Πετεαρσεμθεία μηδʼ ἐπʼ ἄλλον τινὰ τῶν παρʼ αὐτοῦ περὶ

Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
ἐξek from G1537 Preposition
913× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The preposition 'out from' shows movement or origin, like in John 6:31 and Acts 9:3. It helps us understand where people or things come from or are going.
Tyndale gloss
out from
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐκ (transliterated as ek) is a preposition that means 'from' or 'out of,' governing the genitive case. It indicates origin, separation, or motion away from a place, time, or cause. In the New Testament, it is used to denote various relationships, such as source or distinction, and appears in contexts like John 6:31 and Matthew 1:3. Different lexicons highlight its versatility in both literal and metaphorical senses.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐκ (ἐξ),

prep. c. gen.,

from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492).

ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ,

prep. c. gen.,

of motion outwards, separation from (opp. to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from.

Of Place,

of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jo 6:31, Ac 9:3, Ga 1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mt 8:28 17:9, Mk 1:25 7:28, Jo 1:33 20:1, Ac 12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας.) ἐκ, Ju 5, Ac 28:4. Metaph., Mt 7:4, 5, I Pe 2:9; ἐκ τ.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, a preposition governing the genitive. It denotes as well exit or emission out of, as separation from, something with which there has been close connection ; opp. to the prepositions εἰς into and ἐν in: from out of, out from, forth from, from, (Lat. e, ex), [ οἵ. W. 364, 366 (343) sq.; B. 326 sq. (281)]. It is used I. of Pace, and 1. univ. of the place from which; from a surrounding or enclosing place, from the interior of: ἄρτος, ἄγγελος, φῶς ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Jn. vi. 81 sq.; Acts ix. 3 [here RG ἀπό]; Gal. 1. 8; ἀνατολή, δύναμις ἐξ ὕψους, Lk. i. 78; xxiv. 49; esp. after verbs of going, fleeing, leading, calling, freeing, removing, releasing, etc. : ἥκειν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας eis τ. Γαλιλαίαν, Jn. iv. 47; ἐξέρχεσθαι ἔκ τινος out of the body of one (spoken of demons), Mk. i. 25; v. 8 [here L mrg. ἀπό]; vii. 29; of power emanating from the body, Mk. v. 30 [cf. B. 301 (258)…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐκ 190 passages as P Tebt I. 23" (c. B.C. 119 or 114) οὐκ ὀρθῶς κρίνομεν πέπρακταί σοι μὴ ἐκ τῆς ἡμῶν προεδρίας πεφροντικέναι ἀπροσδέητον ἑτέρων γενέσθαι, ‘I consider that you have acted badly in not having been careful that he should be independent of others owing to my superior rank ”’ (Edd. ), 24. 248° (B.c. 117) ἔκ τε τῆς πλείστης προσεδρείας, ‘on account of the prolonged attendance ’’ (Edd.), and P Fay 12} (c. B.C. 103) ἐκ κοινολογ[ς(]α[ς] τ[ἢ]ς συνσταθείσης πρὸς αὐτούς, ‘‘as the result of the colloquy which took place between τ᾿ (Edd.). From this it is an easy transition to the meaning ‘‘ according to”’ or “in accordance with,’’ as in the common legal phrase καθάπερ ἐγ δίκης, ‘‘as if in accordance with a legal decision,’’ z. δ. ‘‘as if a formal decree of the court had been obtained,’’ as in P Eleph 1132 (B.C. 311-0) (= Selections, p- 3), P Ryl 11. 15435 (a.p. 66): cf. P Petr III.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐκ (ek) — out from.

ἐκ,

before a vowel ἐξ, also

__A ἐξ τῳ ϝοίκῳ [Refs] and less frequently ; ἐγ- in Inscrr. before β γ δ λ μ ; Cretan dialect and Boeotian dialect ἐς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἐχ frequently in Attic dialect Inscrr. before χ φ θ (and in early Inscrr. before ς, [Refs]:—preposition governing GEN. only (except in [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—radical sense, from out of, frequently also simply, from.

__A.I OF PLACE, the most frequently usage, variously modified:

__A.I.1 of Motion, out of, forth from, ἐκ Πύλου ἐλθὼν τηλόθεν ἐξ ἀπίης γαίης [Refs 8th c.BC+] to strike with a spear in the hand, opposed to ἀντιτοξεύειν or ἀκοντίζειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐκ χρυσῶν φιαλῶν πίνειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐκ

ek

or ex ex

a primary preposition denoting origin (the point whence action or

motion proceeds), from, out (of place, time, or cause; literal or

figurative; direct or remote):--after, among, X are, at,

betwixt(-yond), by (the means of), exceedingly, (+ abundantly above),

for(- th), from (among, forth, up), + grudgingly, + heartily, X

heavenly, X hereby, + very highly, in, ...ly, (because, by reason) of,

off (from), on, out among (from, of), over, since, X thenceforth,

through,

X unto, X vehemently, with(-out). Often used in composition,

with the same general import; often of completion.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐκ, ἐξ

Prep.

from out, out from among, from

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐκ ek 915x

ἐχ before vowels, with genitive, from, out of, a place, Mt. 2:15; 3:17; of, from, out of, denoting origin or source, Mt. 1:3; 21:19; of, from some material, Mt. 3:9; Rom. 9:21; of, from, among, partitively, Mt. 6:27; 21:31; Mk. 9:17; from, denoting cause, Rev. 8:11; 17:6; means or instrument, Mt. 12:33, 37; by, through, denoting the author or efficient cause, Mt. 1:18; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐκ

ἐξ before a vowel, ἐγ before β γ δ λ μ prep. governing GEN. only, Lat. e, exRadical sense, from out of, opp. to εἰς:

out of, from. c. gen.

OF PLACE:

of Motion, out of, forth from, Hom., etc.: ἐκ θυμοῦ φίλεον I loved her from my heart, with all my heart, Il.

to denote change from one place or condition to another, κακὸν ἐκ κακοῦ one evil from (or after) another, id. Il.; λόγον ἐκ λόγου λέγειν Dem.

to express distinction from a number, ἐκ πόλεων πίσυρες four out of many, Il.

of Position, like ἔξω, outside of, beyond, ἐκ βελέων out of shot, id. Il.; ἐκ καπνοῦ out of the smoke, Od.

with Verbs of Rest, ἐκ ποταμοῦ χρόα νίζετο washed his body with water from the river, id. Od.:—with Verbs signifying to hang or fasten, ἐκ πασσαλόφι κρέμασεν φόρμιγγα he hung his lyre from (i. e. on) the peg, id.…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
28%of
of28% · 258×from26% · 243×out of23% · 216×out from7% · 61×by5% · 51×at2% · 20×other renderings8% · 70×other renderings1% · 14×

933 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 26 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial69%predicate15%subject11%object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 913 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, becἀνάστασιςa rising again,
αὐτός
ἐγείρωI wake, arouse, ἀνίστημιI raise up, set καταβαίνωI go down, come
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύἐγώ
εἰμίI am, exist
οὐNegArticle theτίςIrg
εἷςone
καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, becαὐτός
ἐκfrom913×
what comes after →
Article the
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaθεόςGod, a godστόμαthe mouth, speec
αὐτός
εἰμίI am, existArticle theκαίand, even, also,
νεκρόςdead, a corpse
ἀνίστημιI raise up, set ἐγείρωI wake, arouse, καίand, even, also,
σύ
παραδίδωμιI hand over, delμεριμνάωI am anxious, diἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
πίστιςfaith, belief, trust
ζάωI liveἸησοῦςJesusἀλλάbut, except

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐκ · 913× in the New Testament
John Revelation Luke Acts Matthew Mark Romans Galatians 1 Corinthians 1 John 2 Corinthians Hebrews

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
ἡμῶνegō us G3165 Personal pronoun · first person · genitive · plural
1,872× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
In plain English
Tyndale gloss
I/we
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐγώ, gen, etc., ἐμοῦ, ἐμοί, ἐμέ (enclitic μου, μοι, με), pl. ἡμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς,

pers. pron.

I.

The nom. is usually emphatic, when expressed as subjc, as in Mt 3:11, Mk 1:8, Lk 3:16, al. But often there is no apparent emphasis, as Mt 10:16, Jo 10:17; ἰδοὺ ἐ. (= Heb. הִנֵּנִי, cf. I Ki 3:8), Ac 9:10; ἐ. (like Heb. אֲנִי), I am, Jo 1:23 (LXX), Ac 7:32 (LXX).

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐγώ, gen. ἐμοῦ, enclitic pod; dat. ἐμοί, enclitic μοί; acc. ἐμέ, enclitic μέ; plur. ἡμεῖς, ete.; personal pronoun, J. 1. The nominatives ἐγώ and ἡμεῖς, when joined to a verb, generally have force and emphasis, or indicate antithesis, as Mt. iii. 11; Mk.i. 8; Lk. iii. 16 (ἐγὼ pev... ὁ δέ); Mt. iii. 14 (ἐγὼ... ἔχω, καὶ σύν ; V. 22, 28, 39, and often; ἡμεῖς, contrasted with God, Mt. vi. 12; ἡμεῖς x. of Φαρισαῖοι, Mt. ix. 14; cf. W. § 22,6. But sometimes they are used where there is no emphasis or antithesis in them, as Mt. x. 16; Jn. x. 17; and in many edd. in Mk. i. 2; Lk. vii. 27; οἵ. B. §129, 12. ἰδοὺ ἐγώ, 1397, behold me, hereamT: Acts ix.10 (1S. iii. 8). ἐγώ, like 38, Jam: Jn. i. 23; Acts vii. 32, [ef. W.585 (544); B. 125 (109)]. 2. The enclitic (and monosyllabic) gen., dat., and ace. are connected with nouns, verbs, adverbs, but not with prepositions: ἔμπροσθέν pov, Jn. i. 15; ὀπίσω…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐγώ. Deissmann (ZAZ p. 134 ff.) has drawn attention to the parallels to the solemn use of the first personal pronoun in the Fourth Gospel that may be adduced from inscriptions and magical texts. Thus in an inscr. in honour of Isis from Ios, written in ii/iii A.p., the contents of which are preChristian, we find —Elows ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ τ[ύρανν]ος πάσης χόρας.. ἐγὼ νόμους ἀνθρώποις ἐθέμην . . ἐγώ εἰμι Kpdvov θυγάτηρ πρεσβυτάτη α΄. And similarly in the magical papyrus P Lond 4645 (iv/a.p.) (=I. p. 69) ἐγώ εἰμι ὃ ἀκέφαλος δαίμων . . ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἀλήθεια ὁ μεισῶν ἀδικήματα γείνεσθαι ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ α΄. With the construction of the phrase τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί ; in Jn 24 we may compare BGU IV. 1141°8 (n.c. 14) ἐδίδουν αὐτῷ διαστολὰς μηδὲν αὐτῶι καὶ ἐκείνωι εἶναι : for its meaning see Ε΄. C. Burkitt in 77:5 xiii. p- 594f., where it is rendered, ‘‘ What have I and thou to do with that ?” On the difficult…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μέ (me) — me.

ἐγώ,

I: pronoun of the first person:—Epic dialect mostly ἐγών before vowels (so in Doric dialect, before consonants, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἱών [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:— strengthened ἔγωγε, I at least, for my part, indeed, for myself (more frequently in Attic dialect than in [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Doric dialect ἐγώνγα [Refs 7th c.BC+]: Boeotian dialect ἱώνγα [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἱώνει [Refs]; ἰώγα [Refs 5th c.BC+]: Laconian dialect and Tarentum dialect ἐγώνη, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

II. oblique cases from a different root, genitive ἐμοῦ, enclitic μο; Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἐμέο, ἐμεῦ, μευ, also ἐμέθεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect ἔμεθεν [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect ἐμέος, ἐμεῦς, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect ἐμοῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+] — _dative_ ἐμοί, enclitic μοι (which may be compared with Sanskrit…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐγώ

me

a shorter (and probably originally) from of 1691; me:--I, me, my.

see GREEK for 1691

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐγώ egō 2x

I, gen., ἐμοῦ [μου], dat., ἐμοί [μοι], acc., ἐμέ [με]

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-1GP — Personal pronoun · first person · genitive · plural
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-1GP Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: first Case: Genitive Number: Plural

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

US, pronoun objective case of we.

Give us this day our daily bread.

Us , pron. [OE. us, AS. s; akin to OFries. & OS. s, D. ons, G. uns, Icel. & Sw. oss, Dan. os, Goth. uns, L. nos we, us, Gr. we, Skr. nas us. . Cf. Nostrum, Our.] The persons speaking, regarded as an object; ourselves; — the objective case of we. See We. “Tell us a tale.” Chaucer.

Give us this day our daily bread. Matt. vi. 11.

Us, pron. oblique case of we

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
35%us
us35% · 717×me32% · 644×mine20% · 402×we ourselves6% · 124×my2% · 45×other renderings5% · 97×

2,029 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 27 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
ἐξελθόντεςexerchomai went out G1831 Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
217× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To go out or come out of a place, as in Matthew 10:11 and Mark 1:35, where Jesus and his disciples went out to preach. This word is also used in John 13:30, where Judas went out into the night. It can also mean to spread out or proceed from a place.
Tyndale gloss
to go out
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐξέρχομαι, transliterated as exerchomai, is built from the prefix ἐξ meaning 'out of' and the root ἔρχομαι meaning 'to come' or 'to go.' It generally means to go or come out of a place, and can also refer to escaping, departing, or proceeding. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including the expulsion of demons and the release of prisoners.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐξ-έρχομαι,

[in LXX chiefly and very freq. for יצא, also for עלה ,בֹּוא, etc. ;]

depon.,

to go, or come out of: Mt 10:11, Mk 1:35, Jo 13:30, al.; c. inf., Mt 11:8, Mk 3:21, Lk 7:25, 26 Ac 20:8; id. seq. ἐπί, Mt 26:55, al.; εἰς, Mk 1:38; ἵνα, Re 6:2; ἐ. seq. ἐκ (cl. c. gen. loc.), Mk 5:2, Jo 4:30, al.; ἔξω, c. gen.,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐξέρχομαι ; impf. eEnpyounv; fut. ἐξελεύσομαι; 2 aor. ἐξῆλθον, plur. 2 pers. ἐξήλθετε, 3 pers. ἐξῆλθον, and in LT Tr WH the Atex. forms (see ἀπέρχομαι, init.) ἐξήλGare (Mt. xi. 7, 8,9; xxvi.55; Mk. xiv. 48, ete.), ἐξῆλθαν (1 Jn. ii. 19; 2Jn. 7 [here Tdf. -Ao0v; 3 Jn. 7, ete.]); pe. ἐξελήλυθα;: plpf. ἐξεληλύθειν (Lk. viii. 38, ete.) ; Sept. for N¥? times without number ; to go or come out of; 1. properly; a. with mention of the place out of which one goes, or of the point from which he departs; a. of those who leave a place of their own accord: with the gen. alone, Mt. x.14 (1, Τ Tr WH insert ἔξω) ; Acts xvi. 39RG. foll. by ἐκ : Mk. v. 2; vii. 31; Jn. iv. 30; viii. 59; Acts vii. 3 sq.; 1 Co. v. 10; Rev. xviii. 4, ete. foll. by ἔξω with gen. — with addition of εἰς and ace. of place, Mt. xxi. 17; Mk. xiv. 68; or παρά with ace. of place, Acts xvi. 13; or πρός twa, ace. of pers., Heb. xiii.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐξέρχομαι. For this verb in its ordinary sense it is sufficient to cite P Oxy II. 282" (a complaint against a wife—a.D. 30-35) kata πέρ[α]ς ἐξῆλθε] kal ἀπηνέκαντο (/. —éyKavto) τὰ ἡμέτερα, ‘finally she left the house and they carried off my belongings,” 26. III. 472! (c. A.D. 130) ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκείνου οἰκίας ἐξεληλύθει, 25. 5287 (ii/a.D.) ἀφ᾽ ὡς ἐκξῆλθες (1. €E—) ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ πένθος ἡγούμην, ‘‘ever since you Jeft me I have been in mourning” (Edd.): cf. for the constr. with ἀπό, Lk 55. P Oxy I. 1128 (iii/iv A.D.) δήλωσόν por ἢ πλοίῳ éépx [et] ἢ ὄνῳ shows the verb followed by the instrumental dat.: cf. Jn 21%. For ἐξέρχομαι of the driving forth of demons, as in Mk 178 a/., cf. the magical P Par 5741248 (ili/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 114) ἔξελθε, Satpov,. . . Kal ἀπόστηθι ἀπὸ τοῦ 8(e)i(va), and for the verb followed by ἔπί cf. P Tebt 11. 283° (B.c. 93 or 60) ἐξελήλυθεν ἐπὶ τὴν + + μητέρα pov, “‘made…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐξέρχομαι (exerchomai) — to go out.

ἐξέρχομαι,

future -ελεύσομαι (but in Attic dialect ἔξειμι (A) supplies the future, also imperfect ἐξῄειν): aorist 2 ἐξῆλθον, the only tense used in [Refs 8th c.BC+]:— go or come out of, with genitive loci, τείχεος, πυλάων, πόληος, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐ. δωμάτων, χθονός, etc., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of an actor, come out on the stage, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, come forth, ἐ. καὶ ἀμῦναι [Refs 8th c.BC+]

__b rarely with accusative, ἐξῆλθον τὴν Περσίδα χώραν [LXX+5th c.BC+]

__c absolutely, march out, go forth, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__d of an accused person, withdraw from the country to avoid trial, opposed to φεύγω, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐξέρχομαι

exerchomai

from 1537 and 2064; to issue (literally or figuratively):--come

(forth, out), depart (out of), escape, get out, go (abroad, away,

forth, out, thence), proceed (forth), spread abroad.

see GREEK for 1537

see GREEK for 2064

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐξέρχομαι

v.

I go out, come out

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐξέρχομαι exerchomai 218x

to go or come out of; to come out, Mt. 5:26; 8:34; to proceed, emanate, take rise from, Mt. 2:6; 15:18; 1 Cor. 14:36; to come abroad, 1 Jn. 4:1; to go forth, go away, depart, Mt. 9:31; Lk. 5:8; to escape, Jn. 10:39; to pass away, come to an end, Acts 16:19

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐξέρχομαι fut. -ελεύσομαι in attic ἔξειμι supplies the fut., as also the imperf. ἐξῄειν aor2 ἐξῆλθον Dep.:— to go or come out of, c. gen. loci, Hom., Hdt., etc.; of an actor, to come out on the stage, Ar.:—also c. acc., ἐξ. τὴν χώρην Hdt.:—absol. to go away, march off, Il.: also, to march out, go forth, ἐπί τινα Hdt.:—c. acc. cogn. to go out on an expedition, Xen.: to go through a work, Soph.

ἐξ. εἰς ἔλεγχον to stand forth and come to the trial, Eur.: to turn out so and so, Soph.

c. acc. rei, to execute, Thuc.

of Time, to come to an end, expire, Hdt., Soph.

of prophecies, dreams, events, to be accomplished, come true, Hdt.; ὀρθὸν ἐξ. to come out right, Soph.; μὴ ἐξέλθῃ σαφής lest he turn out a true prophet, id. Soph.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-2AAP-NPM — Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-2AAP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
12%having gone out
having gone out12% · 27×went out11% · 24×having gone forth6% · 13×he went forth5% · 11×he went out3% · 7×went forth3% · 7×came forth3% · 6×going out2% · 5×other renderings55% · 120×

220 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 85 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb87%adverbial12%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 217 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςφιμόωI muzzle, silencεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come in
αὐτός
παράκαταλείπωI leave behind, γάρfor
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theαὐτόςπάλινagain, further,
σύ
δέχομαιI take, receive,λόγοςa word, speech, ἐπιτάσσωI give order, co
τίςIrg
ἀλλάbut, exceptἸωάννηςJohn
ἐξέρχομαιwent out217×
what comes after →
Article the
ἸησοῦςJesusσπείρωI sow, spread, sΦαρισαῖοςa Pharisee
ἐκ
Article theαὐτόςμέσοςmiddle, in the m
εἰς
Article theὑπάντησιςa meetingΜακεδονίαMacedonia
καίand, even, also, nam
ἔρχομαιI come, goἀπέρχομαιI come or go awaγίνομαιI come into bein
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theεἰςεὑρίσκωI find

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐξέρχομαι · 217× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Mark John Acts Revelation Hebrews 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians 1 John 1 Thessalonians 2 John

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament16 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 332 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 2.59c. AD 40

"ἔξελθε ἐκ τῆς γῆς σου καὶ ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας σου“ (Gen.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 11.8c. AD 100

νῦν δὲ ὅ λέγει: τὰ φύλλα οὐκ ἀπορυήσεται, τοῦτο λέγει: ὅτι πᾶν ῥῆμα, ὃ ἐὰν ἐξελεύσεται ἐξ ὑμῶν διὰ τοῦ στόματος ὑμῶν ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀγάπῃ, ἔσται εἰς ἐπιστροφὴν καὶ ἐλπίδα πολλοῖς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 7th c. AD
O.Claud. 4 876Mons ClaudianusAD 150–AD 154

Σωκράτης Ἀθηνοδώρῳ καὶ Ἀμμωνίῳ ἀμφοτέροις χαίρειν. καλῶς ποιήσετε ἐξελθόντες εἰς Τιβεριανὴν στομώσαντες τὰ σιδήρια τῶν σκληρουργῶν. ἄχρηστα γὰρ πάντα τὰ σιδήρια ἅπαξ ἵνα

O.Claud. 4 877Mons ClaudianusAD 150–AD 154

τιμιωτάτοις χαίρειν. καλῶς ποιήσετε ἐπεὶ οἱ σκληρουργοὶ λέγουσίν μοι ὅτι οὐχ εἰσερχόμεθα ἔσω στομῶντες ἐξελθόντες στομώσατε. καὶ γράφετε ἡμᾶς ἀργεῖν. ἐκ δύο τὸ … ἓν δρᾶ, ἵνα στομώσητε ἢ

O.Claud. 4 887Mons ClaudianusAD 150–AD 154

σφῆνας εὐχαριστοῦμεν αὐτοῖς. βέβληται καὶ ἐπιβεβλήμεθα … τὴν πλάκα. εἰ οὖν θέλεις ἵνα ἀπαρτισθῇ, ἔξελθε στομώσειν αὐτοῖς καὶ ἆρον αὐτῶν τὴν πρόφασιν μετὰ δύο σφυροκόπων Μα … Μωνισπος

Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
ἐτάραξανtarassō troubled G5015 Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · plural
18× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To trouble someone means to stir them up or disturb their peace, like in John 11:33 and Acts 15:24. It's about causing someone to feel upset or agitated.
Amplified meaning
troubled, disturbed
Tyndale gloss
to trouble
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ταράσσω (tarassō) means to disturb or trouble, both physically and mentally. It can refer to agitating water or causing emotional unrest, as seen in various New Testament passages like John 1:5 and Matthew 2:3. The word is built from a root meaning to stir up, and it encompasses a range of uses from physical agitation to mental confusion.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ταράσσω

[in LXX for בָּהַל, רָגַז, etc., forty-six words in all ;]

to disturb, trouble, stir up: primarily in physical sense (Hom., Eur.): τ. ὕδωρ, Jo 1:5 [4], 7. Metaph., of the mind (Æsch., Plat., al.), to trouble, disquiet, perplex: Ac 15:24, Ga 1:7 5:10; ἑαυτόν (troubled himself; Westc., in l.), Jo 11:33; of a crowd, to stir up, Ac 17:8, 13; pass., Mt 2:3 14:26, Mk 6:50, Lk 1:12 24:38, Jo 12:27 (Ps 5 (6):4) Ps 14:1, 27, I Pe 3:14 (LXX); τ.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ταράσσω ; impf. ἐτάρασσον ; 1 aor. érdpata ; Pass., pres. impy. 3 pers. sing. ταρασσέσθω ; impf. ἐταρασσόμην ; pf. τετάραγμαι ; Laor. ἐταράχθην ; fr. Hom. down; to agitate, trouble (a thing, by the movement of its parts to and fro) ; a. prop.: τὸ ὕδωρ, Jn. v. 4 [RL], 7, (Ezek. Xxxii. 2; τὸν πόντον, Hom. Od. 5, 291; τὸ πέλαγος, Eur. Tro. 88 ; τὸν ποταμόν, Aesop. fab. 87 (25)). b. trop. to cause one inward commotion, take away his calmness of mind, disturb his equanimity ; to disquiet, make restless, (Sept. for 573, etc.; pass. ταράσσομαι for 12, to be stirred up, irritated); a. to stir up: τὸν ὄχλον, Acts Xvii. 8; [τοὺς ὄχλους, Acts xvii. 13 LT Tr WH]. B. to trouble: τινά, to strike one’s spirit with fear or dread, pass., Mt. ii. 3; xiv. 26; Mk. vi. 50; Lk. i. 12; [xxiv. 38]; 1 Pet. iii. 14; ταράσσεται ἡ καρδία, Jn. xiv. 1, 27; to affect with great pain or sorrow: ἑαυτόν (cf. our to…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ταράσσω in the metaph. sense ‘‘trouble,”’ ‘ disquiet,” ‘ perplex,” asin Mt 23 a/., isseenin P Tebt II. 315) (ii/A.D.) τοιγαροῦν [μη]δὲν ταραχ[θ]ῇς, ‘do not be disturbed on this account ”” (Edd.), and νὰ 373 (=8 810)!8 (i/A.D.) ods ἐπὶ τῇ ψευδῶς ἐπι[σἸτολῇ πρὸς ὑμᾶς κομισθείσῃ τῷ τῶν ὑπάτων ὀνόματι ταραχθέντες πρός με ἐπέμψατε. For a somewhat more literal meaning ‘‘stir up,” as in Ac 17318, cf. P Oxy II. 29827 (i/A.D.) πάλι yap πάντα ταράσσει, ‘for he is upsetting everything again” (Edd.), and P Giss I. 40% (A.D. 212-5) (= Chrest. I. p. 58) ταράσσουσι τὴν πόλιν. MGr ταράζω(--ἀσσω), “‘ perplex.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ταράσσω (tarassō) — to trouble.

τᾰράσσω,

[Refs 5th c.BC+]; Attic dialect ταράττω [Refs 5th c.BC+]; also θράσσω (which see): future ταράξω [Refs]aorist ἐτάραξα [Refs 8th c.BC+]: pluperfect συν-ετεταράχει [Refs 2nd c.AD+]perfect in passive sense τέτρηχα (see. below [Refs]:—passive, future ταραχθήσομαι [Refs 4th c.BC+]; middle ταράξομαι in passive sense, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐταράχθην [Refs 5th c.BC+]perfect τετάραγμαι[Refs], etc.:—stir, trouble, in a physical sense, σύναγεν νεφέλας ἐτάραξε δὲ πόντον [Ποσειδῶν] [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐ χθόνα ταράσσοντες troubling not the earth (by ploughing), [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τ. φάρμακον perhaps mix, [Refs 5th c.BC+] to wag the tongue, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πάντα τ., of a speaker, jumble up, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ταράσσω

tarasso

of uncertain affinity; to stir or agitate (roil water):--trouble.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ταράσσω

v.

I agitate, stir up, trouble

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ταράσσω tarassō 17x

to agitate, trouble, as water, Jn. 5:7; met. to agitate, trouble the mind; with fear, to terrify, put in consternation, Mt. 2:3; 14:26; with grief, etc., affect with grief, anxiety, etc., Jn. 12:27; 13:21; with doubt, etc., to unsettle, perplex, Acts 15:24; Gal. 1:7

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ταράσσω cf. θράσσω Root ΤΑΡΑΧ to stir, stir up, trouble, in a physical sense, ἐτάραξε πόντον Od.; ὁμοῦ τ. τήν τε γῆν καὶ τὴν θάλατταν Ar.; βροντήμασι κυκάτω πάντα Aesch.; πάντα τ., of a speaker, to jumble up, Dem.; δεινὰ τ. makes "confusion worse confounded," Soph.

to trouble the mind, confound, agitate, disturb, disquiet, Trag., Plat., etc.: absol. to cause confusion, Plat.

of an army, to throw into disorder, Hdt., Xen., etc.:—Pass. to be in disorder, Hdt., Thuc.

of political matters, to agitate, distract, Ar.:—Pass. to be in a state of disorder or anarchy, Thuc., Dem.

ταράττεσθαι ἐπὶ τῶν ἵππων to be shaken in one's seat on horseback, Xen.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AAI-3P — Verb · aorist · active · indicative · third person · plural
aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AAI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
33%troubled
troubled33% · 6×troubling17% · 3×should be troubled11% · 2×they stirred up6% · 1×agitating6% · 1×shall you be troubled6% · 1×he was troubled6% · 1×they were troubled6% · 1×other renderings11% · 2×

18 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 10 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 18 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ὁράωI see, look uponκολυμβήθραa pool, swimmingπνεῦμαwind, breath, sp
ἐγώ
ψυχήthe soul, life, ἐκ
μήNeg
σύ
ἩρῴδηςHerod
βασιλεύςa king, ruler, e
περιπατέωI walk, conduct my l
θάλασσαthe sea, lake
ταράσσωtroubled18×
what comes after →
Article the
ὕδωρwaterδέbut, on the otheπνεῦμαwind, breath, sp
σύ
Article theλόγοςa word, speech, καίand, even, also,
καίand, even, also, nam
πᾶςall, the whole, τίςIrg
λέγωI say, speak
ὅτιthat, since, bec
ΖαχαρίαςZechariah
ὁράωI see, look upon

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceταράσσω · 18× in the New Testament
John Acts Galatians Luke Matthew 1 Peter Mark
Across the New Testament7 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 7.359c. AD 75–95

Ὡς δʼ ᾔσθοντο τῆς βοῆς Ἀδωνίας τε καὶ οἱ παρόντες ἐπὶ τὸ δεῖπνον ἐταράχθησαν, ὅ τε στρατηγὸς Ἰώαβος ἔλεγεν οὐκ ἀρέσκεσθαι τοῖς ἤχοις οὐδὲ τῇ σάλπιγγι.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 5th c. AD
P.Oxy. 59 4001OxyrhynchosAD 301–AD 400

ὅπως εὐθυμοῦσαι καὶ ὑγιαίνουσαι ἀπολάβητε τὰ παρʼ ἐμοῦ γράμματα. πάνυ γὰρ ἡμᾶς Ἡρακλάμμων ἐλθὼν ἐτάραξεν, ὅτι φησίν, ἐνόσησεν Κύρα ἡ ἀδελφὴ ἡμῶν, ἀλλʼ εὐχαριστοῦμεν τῇ θείᾳ προνοίᾳ τῇ πανταχοῦ

P.Alex. p. 15 no. 439AD 301–AD 700

πάτερα μου · ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἡ κοινῶς … … καὶ οὐκ ὀλίγον καὶ σφόδρα ἐταράχθη … … ἀναγνώσεως τῶν ἐλαχίστων μοῦ γραμμάτων … … ἀναπαύσωμαι φροντίδος, ἐπειδὴ ὡς αμω

Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
ὑμᾶςsu you G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · accusative · plural
2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.
Tyndale gloss
you
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-2AP — Personal pronoun · second person · accusative · plural
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2AP Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Accusative Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
78%you
you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg
ἐν
Article theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein
πρός
ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de
σύyou2892×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐν
ἐν
Article theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
λόγοιςlogos by words G3056 Noun · dative · plural · masculine
331× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
In the Bible, this word refers to a message or idea expressed through words, like in Matthew 8:8 and Luke 7:7. It's not just a single word, but a whole thought or concept. Jesus used this word to teach about God's kingdom.
Amplified meaning
with words, teachings
Tyndale gloss
word
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

λόγος (logos) is a Greek word meaning 'word' or 'speech,' derived from the verb λέγω (lego). It encompasses a range of meanings including a saying, statement, discourse, or even the inward thought itself. In the New Testament, it often refers to the word of God or teachings, appearing in verses like Matthew 8:8 and John 1:1. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement regarding its meanings.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — φωνή, λόγος from a scan

On these words, and on their relation to one another, very much has been written by the Greek grammarians and natural philosophers (see Lersch, Sprachphilosophie der Alten, vol. iii. pp. 85, 45, and passim). Φωνή, from φάω, ds φωτίζουσα τὸ νοούμενον (Plutarch, De Plac. Phil. 19), rendered in our Version ‘ voice’ (Matt. ii. 18), ‘sound’ (John iii. 8), ‘noise’ (Rev. vi. 1), is distinguished from ψόφος, in that it is the cry of a living creature (ἡ δὲ φωνὴ ψόφος τίς ἐστιν ἐμψύχου, Aristotle, De Anima, 2. 8. 14), being sometimes ascribed to God (Matt. ui. 17), to men (Matt. iii. 3), to animals (Rev. ix. 9), and, though improperly, to inanimate objects as well (1 Cor. xiv. 7), as to the trumpet (Matt. xxiv. 31), to the wind (John iii. 8), to the thunder (Rev. vi. 1; οἵ. Ps. lxxvi. 19). But λόγος, a word, saying, or rational utterance of the νοῦς, whether spoken (προφορικός, and thus φωνὴ τῶν…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λόγος, -ου, ὁ (< λέγω),

[in LXX chiefly for

דָּבָר, also for אֵמֶר, מִלָּה, etc.;]

Of that by which the inward thought is expressed, Lat. oratio, sermo, vox, verbum.

a word, not in the grammatical sense of a mere name (ἔπος, ὄνομα, ῥῆμα), but a word as embodying a conception or idea: Mt 8:8, Lk 7:7, I Co 14:9, 19, He 12:19, al.

a saying, statement, declaration: Mt 19:22 (T om.), Mk 5:36 7:29, Lk 1:29, Jo 2:22 6:60, Ac…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λόγος, -ov, 6, (λέγω), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. esp. for 425, also for 798 and 799; prop. ὦ collecting, collection, (see Aéyw), —and that, as well of those things which are put together in thought, as of those which, having been thought i. e. gathered together in the mind, are expressed in words. Accordingly, a twofold use of the term is to be distinguished: one which relates to speaking, and one which relates to thinking. I. As respects SPEECH: 1. a word, yet not in the grammatical sense (i. q. vocabulum, the mere name of an object), but language, voz, i. e. a word which, uttered by the living voice, embodies a conception or idea; (hence it differs from ῥῆμα and ἔπος [q. v.; cf. also λαλέω, ad init.]): Heb. xii. 19; ἀποκριθῆναι λόγον, Mt. xxii. 46; εἰπεῖν λόγῳ, Mt. viii. 8 [Rec. λόγον (cf. εἶπον, 3 a. fin.)]; Lk. vii. 7; λαλῆσαι πέντε, μυρίους, λόyous, 1 Co. xiv. 19; διδόναι λόγον…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λόγος “Λόγον διδόναι with reference to judgment, as in Rom 14!2, occurs in such a passage as BGU I. 164?! (ii/iii A.D.) ὡς σοῦ μέλλοντος λόγον διδόναι τῷ λαμπροτάτῳ ἡγεμόνι, and λόγον ἀποδιδόναι (cf. Mt 1255, Lk 162, Heb 1.317} in 20. 98% (a.p. 211) κελεῦσαι αὐτὸν ἀχθῆναι ἐπὶ σὲ λόγον ἀποδώσοντα περὶ See also the Christianized imprecations against violators of tombs cited by Ramsay (Zzke, p- 396), one probably from Lycaonia and belonging to iv/a.p., /HS xxii. (1902), p. 354 ὃς δ᾽ ἐὰν ἐπισβιάσητε, δώσει θεῷ λόγον, “‘whosoever shall force an entrance, shall give account to God,”” and another from Laodicea, Athen. Mitthetl. xiii. Pp. 249 (¢. A.D. 400) ἤ τις δ᾽ ἕτερον ἐπενβάλῃ τῷ τάφῳ κριτῇ τῷ ζῶντι λόγον ἔνδικον πο[ι]ή[σει, ‘and if any one shall lay another in the tomb, he shall render judicial account to the | living Judge.”’ tions, p. 56), where so much is paid εἰς λόγον διατροφῆς, | “το…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

λόγος (logos) — word.

λόγος, ὁ,

verbal noun of λέγω (B), with senses corresponding to λέγω (B) II and III (on the various senses of the word see [Refs 2nd c.AD+] 111, compareinfr. VI. 1 a:

I. computation, reckoning (compare λέγω (B) II).

I.1. account of money handled, σανίδες εἰς ἃς τὸν λ. ἀναγράφομεν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; συνᾶραι λόγον μετά τινος settle accounts with, [NT]; δεύτεροι λ. a second audit, [Refs 4th c.AD+]; ὁ τραπεζιτικὸς λ. banking account, Theo Sm.p.73 H.: metaphorically, οὐκ ἂν πριαίμην οὐδενὸς λ. βροτόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I.1. b public accounts, i. e. branch of treasury, ἴδιος λ., in Egypt, [Refs]; also as title of treasurer, [Refs 1st c.BC+]; δημόσιος λ., = Latin fiscus, [Refs 1st c.AD+], etc. (but later, = aerarium, [Refs 4th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

λόγος

logos

from 3004; something said (including the thought); by implication, a

topic (subject of discourse), also reasoning (the mental faculty) or

motive; by extension, a computation; specially, (with the article in

John) the Divine Expression (i.e. Christ):--account, cause,

communication, X concerning, doctrine, fame, X have to do, intent,

matter, mouth, preaching, question, reason, + reckon, remove,

say(-ing), shew, X speaker, speech, talk, thing, + none of these

things move me, tidings, treatise, utterance, word, work.

see GREEK for 3004

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

λόγος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a word, speech, divine utterance, analogy

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λόγος logos 330x

a word, a thing uttered, Mt. 12:32, 37; 1 Cor. 14:19; speech, language, talk, Mt. 22:15; Lk. 20:20; 2 Cor. 10:10; Jas. 3:2; converse, Lk. 24:17; mere talk, wordy show, 1 Cor. 4:19, 20; Col. 2:23; 1 Jn. 3:18; language, mode of discourse, style of speaking, Mt. 5:37; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

λόγος λόγος, ὁ, λέγω3 (A) the word or that by which the inward thought is expressed, Lat. oratio; and, (B) the inward thought itself, Lat. ratio.

Lat. vox, oratio, that which is said or spoken:

a word, pl. words, i. e. language, talk, Hom., etc.; λόγου ἕνεκα, Lat. dicis causa, merely for talking's sake, Plat.; λόγῳ in word, in pretence, opp. to ἔργῳ (in deed, in reality), Hdt., attic

a word, saying, statement, Thuc.: an oracle, Pind., Plat.:— a saying, maxim, proverb, Pind., Aesch.

an assertion, promise, Soph.

a resolution, κοινῷ λ. by common consent, Hdt.

a condition, ἐπὶ λόγῳ τοιῷδε id. Hdt.

a command, Aesch.

speech, discourse, conversation, εἰς λόγους ἐλθεῖν, συνελθεῖν, ἀφικέσθαι τινί Hdt., attic; λόγου μεῖζον, κρεῖσσον beyond expression, Hdt., Thuc.; λόγου ἄξιον worth mention…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-DPM — Noun · dative · plural · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-DPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

→ Of Jesus

Gracious Lu 4:22

Are spirit and life Joh 6:63

Of eternal life Joh 6:68

Will judge Joh 12:47,48

→ Of the wise

As goads, and as well-fastened nails Ec 12:11

Gracious Ec 10:12

→ Spoken at the proper moment Pr 15:23; Isa 50:4

→ Aptly spoken, like apples of gold in filigree of silver Pr 25:11

→ Of the complete man, gentle Jas 3:2

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
59%word
word59% · 196×words17% · 57×account3% · 10×speech3% · 10×saying3% · 9×other renderings6% · 21×other renderings9% · 29×

332 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 29 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object45%adverbial25%subject23%predicate4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 331 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἀκούωI hear, listenκαίand, even, also,διά
ἐν
παγιδεύωI ensnare, entraαὐτόςδυνατόςpowerful, able,
αὐτός
Article theἀποκρίνομαιI answer, replyπερί
διά
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existμήτεNeg
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theἄλλοςother, another,
λόγοςby words331×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godκύριοςlord, Lord, mastπροφητείαprophecy
οὗτος
Article theκαίand, even, also,λέγωI say, speak
καίand, even, also, nam
πᾶςall, the whole, ἰάομαιI healἄκαρποςunfruitful, barr
ἐγώ
οὐNegτηρέωI keep, guard, oὅστις
ὅς
λέγωI say, speakλαλέωI speak, sayἀκούωI hear, listen

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceλόγος · 331× in the New Testament
Acts John Luke Matthew Mark Revelation 1 Corinthians Hebrews 1 Thessalonians 2 Corinthians 1 Timothy 2 Timothy

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament24 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 536 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 4c. AD 40

καὶ γὰρ λόγον καὶ ἀκοὴν ὑπερβάλλει μείζω καὶ σεμνότερα ὄντα ἢ ὡς θνητοῦ τινος ὀργάνοις ἐναρμοσθῆναι.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.2c. AD 75–95

τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 6.17c. AD 100

ὅτι πρῶτον τὸ παιδίον μέλιτι, εἶτα γάλακτι ζωοποιεῖται: οὕτως οὖν καὶ ἡμεῖς τῇ πίστει τῆς ἐπαγγελίας καὶ τῷ λόγῳ ζωοποιούμενοι ζήσομεν κατακυριεύοντες τῆς γῆς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD

ἔτους λε Μεσορὴ ἰδίου λόγου Δρύτωνος. ἐκ τῆς νήσου πρὸς Λαμένθιν δέδωκα πυροῦ ιδ κριθῆς β ἐμβαδικὸν δραχμὰς λ

P.Grenf. 1 22Thebais119 BC

Μοσχίων Πετεαρσένθει χαίρειν. ἔχω εἰς τὸν Ἑρμίου λόγον περὶ πῆς τοπογραμματείας τοῦ νγ ἔτους χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δέκα. γίνεται τάλαντα ι. καὶ περὶ

P.Grenf. 2 26Pathyris104 BC

Ἑλληνικῶν ἃ ἐξέτεισε Παοῦς ὁ Ὥρου πατὴρ καὶ ὁ αὐτὸς Ὧρος εἰς τὸν Ταρεήσιος λόγον τῆς αὐτοῦ μητρὸς τοῖς δανεισταῖς Χαιρήμωνι καὶ Ἐσθλαδᾷ καὶ Πνήφει γυναικὶ καὶ ἀδελφῇ· καὶ

Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
ἀνασκευάζοντεςanaskeuazō upsetting G384 Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To upset means to thoroughly disrupt or destroy something, like packing up baggage to leave a place. In Acts 15:24, it refers to subverting people's minds. It's about causing disturbance or upheaval.
Amplified meaning
causing confusion, disturbing
Tyndale gloss
to upset
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀνασκευάζω (anaskeuazo) is built from the prefix ἀνα- and the root σκεῦος, meaning 'vessel' or 'baggage.' It covers a range of meanings from packing up and dismantling to destroying and subverting. In the New Testament, it appears in Acts 15:24, where it conveys the idea of unsettling or perverting. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

* ἀνα-σκευάζω

(< σκεῦος, a vessel),

prop. to pack up baggage, hence, to dismantle, ravage, destroy; metaph., to unsettle, subvert (MM, VGT, s.v.): ψυχάς, Ac 15:24.†

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀνασκευάζω. P Oxy IV. 745° (c. A.p. 1) p[\]... πάλιν ἑατοὺς ἀνασκευάζωμε[ν] μὴ οὔσης χρήας, ‘and we go bankrupt again without any necessity” (Edd.). This really involves the meaning ‘‘subvert” found in Ac 15*4, drawn from the military sense, ‘‘to plunder,’ Vettius Valens has the word twice: p. 21279, ἐὰν δόξῃ τις ἐν αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκπλοκήν τινα πεποιηκέναι πράγματός τινος, ἀνασκευασθήσεται καὶ ἐπιτάραχον γενήσεται καὶ ἐπιζήμιον ἢ εὐκαθαίρετον καὶ προσκοπτικόν, and 2833 τῷ δὲ AO ἔτει “dismantle ” a town. τοῦ πράγματος ἀνασκευασθέντος διὰ τὴν προύπάρχουσαν ἔχθραν εἰς νῆσον κατεδικάσθη. Kroll (Index s.v.) makes it here “τ. τ. iudiciorum,” the ‘‘ reversal” of a judgement presumably. The noun (p. 22877) ἀνασκευασμοὺς τηκτῶν πραγμάτων does not look technical—‘‘ upset’? would seem to represent it, as in the phrase ἀνασκευαὶ πραγμάτων (four…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀνασκευάζω (anaskeuazō) — to upset.

ἀνασκευ-άζω,

pack up the baggage (τὰ σκεύη), and so, carry away, remove, τὴν ἀγορὰν εἴσω[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. τοὺς Ἀθηναίους ἐκ θαλάττης divert them from naval enterprise, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:— in middle, break up camp, march away, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. dismantle a place, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—in middle, dismantle one's house or city, [Refs]

3. waste, ravage, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. τὰς συνθήκας break them, [Refs 2nd c.BC+]:—in middle, τάφον[Refs 1st c.AD+]

4. passive, to be bankrupt, τῆς τραπέζης ἀνασκευασθείσης[Refs 4th c.BC+]; οἱ ἀνεσκευασμένοι τῶν τραπεζιτῶν broken bankers, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀνασκευάζω

anaskeuazo

from 303 (in the sense of reversal) and a derivative of 4632;

properly, to pack up (baggage), i.e. (by implication, and

figuratively) to upset:--subvert.

see GREEK for 303

see GREEK for 4632

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀνασκευάζω

v.

I pervert, unsettle, destroy

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀνασκευάζω anaskeuazō 1x

pr. to collect one’s effects or baggage (σκεύη) in order to remove; to lay waste by carrying off or destroying every thing; met. to unsettle, pervert, subvert, Acts 15:24*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀνασκευάζω to pack up the baggage (τὰ σκεύη), Lat. vasa colligere: to carry away, Xen.:—Mid. to break up one's camp, march away, Thuc., Xen.

to disfurnish, dismantle a place, Thuc.: Mid. to dismantle one's house or city, id. Thuc.

to waste, ravage, destroy, Xen.

Pass. to be bankrupt, break, of bankers, Dem.; metaph., ἀνεσκευάσμεθα we are ruined, Eur.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-NPM — Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%upsetting
upsetting100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Concordanceἀνασκευάζω · 1× in the New Testament
Acts
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
τὰςho the G3588 Article · accusative · plural · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-APF — Article · accusative · plural · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-APF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
ψυχὰςpsuchē minds G5590 Noun · accusative · plural · feminine
102× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for soul refers to the breath of life or the seat of emotions and desires, as seen in Matthew 6:25 and John 10:11. It is the essence of a person, encompassing their will and affections. This concept is central to understanding human nature in the Bible.
Amplified meaning
souls, thoughts
Tyndale gloss
soul
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ψυχή (psuchē) refers to the soul or life principle, often associated with breath and the vital force in living beings. It encompasses the emotional and moral aspects of a person, functioning as the seat of desires and affections. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including references to life, the self, and the spiritual essence of individuals, as seen in verses like Matthew 10:28 and 1 Peter 1:9.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ψυχή, -ῆς, ἡ,

[in LXX very freq. for נֶפֶשׁ, sometimes for לֵבַב ,לֵב, etc. ;]

breath (Lat. anima), breath of life, life (Hom., al.; in Arist., of the vital principle): Mt 6:25, Mk 3:4 10:45, Lk 12:22, Jo 10:11, Ac 20:10, 24, II Co 1:23, Phl 2:30, I Th 2:8, al.

the soul,

as the seat of the will, desires and affections: Mt 26:38, Mk 12:30 (LXX) 14:34, Lk 1:46, Jo 10:24,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ψυχή, -ῆς, ἡ, (ψύχω, to breathe, blow), fr. Hom. down, Sept. times too many to count for wj, occasionally also for 27 and 339; 1. breath (Lat. anima),i.e. a. the breath of life; the vital force which animates the body and shows itself in breathing: Acts xx. 10; of animals, Rey. viii. 9, (Gen. ix. 4 34.; xxxv. 18; ἐπιστραφήτω ἡ Ψυχὴ τοῦ παιδαρίου, 1 K. xvii. 21); so also in those pass. where, in accordance with the trichotomy or threefold division of human nature by the Greeks, ἡ Ψυχή is distinguished from τὸ πνεῦμα (see πνεῦμα, 2 p. 530" [and reff. 8. v. rv. 5]), 1 Th. v. 23; Heb. iv. 12. b. life: μεριμνᾶν τῇ ψυχῇ, Mt. vi. 25; Lk. xii. 22; τὴν ψυχὴν ἀγαπᾶν, Rev. xii. 11; [μισεῖν, Lk. xiv. 26]; τιθέναι, Jn. x. 11, 15, 17; xiii. 37 sq.; xv. 13; 1 Jn. iii. 16; παραδιδόναι, Acts xv. 26; διδόναι (λύτρον. q. v-), Mt. xx. 28; Mk. x. 45; ζητεῖν τὴν ψυχήν twos (see ζητέω, 1 a.), Mt. ii. 20; Ro.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ψυχή (psuchē) — soul.

ψῡχ-ή, ἡ,

life, λύθη ψ. τε μένος τε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ψυχὰς παρθέμενοι at hazard of their lives, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; λίσσου᾽ ὑπὲρ ψ. καὶ γούνων by your life,[Refs 5th c.BC+] to save their life, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ὃ ἂν θέλῃ, ψυχῆς ὠνεῖται [θυμός] in exchange for life, [NT+7th c.BC+]; τῆς ἐμῆς ψ. γεγώς[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ποινὴν τῆς Αἰσώπου ψ. satisfaction for the life of [NT+5th c.BC+]; δεῖρον ἄχρις ἡ ψ... ἐπὶ χειλέων λειφθῇ within an inch of his life, [Refs 3rd c.BC+] —the phrase ἐν τῇ χειρὶ τὴν ψ. ἔχοντα taking his life in his hands, is probably falsa lectio in [LXX+4th c.BC+]; of life in animals, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἡ φύσις τοιαύτη πάντων ὅσσα ψ. ἔχει Democrit.278; ἐπῴζει καὶ ποιεῖ ψ. ἔχειν (of incubation) [LXX+5th c.BC+]; ἡ ψ. πάσης σαρκὸς αἷμα αὐτοῦ…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ψυχή

psuche

from 5594; breath, i.e. (by implication) spirit, abstractly or

concretely (the animal sentient principle only; thus distinguished on

the one hand from 4151, which is the rational and immortal soul; and

on the other from 2222, which is mere vitality, even of plants: these

terms thus exactly correspond respectively to the Hebrew 5315, 7307

and 2416):--heart (+ -ily), life, mind, soul, + us, + you.

see GREEK for 5594

see GREEK for 4151

see GREEK for 2222

see HEBREW for 05315

see HEBREW for 07307

see HEBREW for 02416

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ψυχή, ῆς, ἡ

n.f.

the soul, life, self

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ψυχή psychē 103x

breath; the principle of animal life; the life, Mt. 2:20; 6:25; Mk. 3:4; Lk. 21:19; Jn. 10:11; an inanimate being, 1 Cor. 15:45; a human individual, soul, Acts 2:41; 3:23; 7:14; 27:37; Rom. 13:1; 1 Pet. 3:20; the immaterial soul, Mt. 10:28; 1 Pet. 1:9; 2:11, 25; 4:19; the soul as the seat of religious and moral sentiment, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ψυχή ψυ_χή, ἡ, ψύχω breath, Lat. anima, esp. as the sign of life, the life, spirit, Hom., etc.; ψυχή τε μένος τε ψυχή τε καὶ αἰών, ψυχὴ καὶ θυμός Hom.; τὸν δ᾽ ἔλιπε ψυχή, of one swooning, Il.; ψυχὴν παρθέμενος staking or risking one's life, Od.; so, ἐμὴν ψυχὴν παραβαλλόμενος Il.; περὶ ψυχῆς for one's life, i. e. to save it, Od.; μάχεσθαι, θέειν περὶ ψυχῆς Hom.; τρέχειν περὶ ψυχῆς Hdt.; ὁ περὶ τῆς ψυχῆς ἀγών the struggle is for life and death, Soph.; ποινὴν τῆς Αἰσώπου ψυχῆς ἀνελέσθαι to take revenge for the life of Aesop, Hdt.; ψυχὴν ἀφιέναι to give up the ghost, Eur.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-APF — Noun · accusative · plural · feminine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked plural feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-APF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Plural Gender: Feminine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
40%soul
soul40% · 42×life34% · 36×souls19% · 20×lives4% · 4×other renderings4% · 4×

106 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object51%adverbial23%subject19%predicate3%indirect object2%second object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 102 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
καίand, even, also,ἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose,ζητέωI seek, search f
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
δέbut, on the otheArticle theἐπί
καίand, even, also, nam
δύναμαιI am powerful, aκαρδίαthe heart, innerσῶμαbody, flesh
γάρfor
Article theἀποβολήa casting away,
δέbut, on the other ha
Article the
ψυχήminds102×
what comes after →
αὐτός
ἕνεκασῴζωI save, healτίθημιI put, place
σύ
καίand, even, also,τίςIrgἀπαιτέωI ask back, ask
ἐγώ
τίθημιI put, placeἕωςuntil, as far asArticle the
Article the
παιδίονa little child, ἔθνοςa race, people, μαθητήςa learner, disci
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theσῶμαbody, fleshπνεῦμαwind, breath, sp

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceψυχή · 102× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Mark Revelation 1 Peter Hebrews Romans 1 John 1 Thessalonians 2 Corinthians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament19 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 430 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 6c. AD 40

ὡς γὰρ τῶν κολοσσιαίων μεγεθῶν τὰς ἐμφάσεις καὶ ἡ βραχυτάτη σφραγὶς τυπωθεῖσα δέχεται, οὕτως τάχα που καὶ τὰ τῆς ἀναγραφείσης ἐν τοῖς νόμοις κοσμοποιίας ὑπερβάλλοντα κάλλη καὶ ταῖς μαρμαρυγαῖς τὰς τῶν ἐντυγχανόντων ψυχὰς ἐπισκιάζοντα βραχυτέροις…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.34c. AD 75–95

ἔπλασεν ὁ θεὸς τὸν ἄνθρωπον χοῦν ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς λαβών, καὶ πνεῦμα ἐνῆκεν αὐτῷ καὶ ψυχήν.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.4c. AD 100

πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
4th c. AD 6th c. AD 8th c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD
BGU 4 1141Alexandria15 BC–14 BC

σου καὶ συνεξελεύθερον. οὐδὲ γὰρ ἐφιλίασά σοι εἰς τὸ ἀφαρπάσαι τι, ἀλλὰ ἡ σὴ ψυχὴ ἐπίσταται, ὅτι ὡς δοῦλος ἐπʼ ἐλευθερίᾳ θέλει ἀρέσαι οὕτω καὶ ἐγὼ τὴν φιλίαν σου

πεπομφέναι. οὐ γὰρ ζητῶ τὸν ἀριθμόν, ἀλλʼ εἰ οὗτοι λῃσταὶ ἦσαν. … εἶπεν, περὶ ψυχῆς ἀγωνίζομαι δύο φίλων τολμησάντων … κα α … … … ναγκη … … ρ

Μαύρου καὶ Ἀμμωνίου ἀραβοτοξοτῶν, ὡς, ἀγανακτησάντων αὐτῶν ἐπιπλησσομένου μου, διαλῦσαι ἡμᾶς, καὶ μόλις ἐπικερδᾶναι ψυχῆς ἐπιβουλήν · ἀναγκαίως τὴν ἐπίδοσιν τῶν βιβλιδίων ποιοῦμαι καὶ ἀξιῶ ἀχθῆναι αὐτὸν πρὸς τὸ

Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
ὑμῶνsu of you G4771 Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · plural
2,892× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means 'you' and is used to address someone directly, like in John 1:30 and Matthew 26:64. It's a way to emphasize or contrast the person being spoken to. The KJV Bible translates it as 'thou'.
Tyndale gloss
you
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

σύ is the second-person singular pronoun meaning 'you' in Greek. It has various forms: genitive σοῦ, dative σοί, and accusative σέ. The word can be used for emphasis or contrast, particularly in the New Testament, as seen in verses like Matthew 26:64. It also appears in various dialects and has enclitic forms.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

σύ,

pron. of 2nd pers.,

thou, you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, pl., ὑμεῖς, -ῶν, -ῖν, -ᾶς (enclitic in oblique cases sing., except after prep. (BL, §48, 3), though πρὸς σέ occurs in Mt 25:39). Nom. for emphasis or contrast: Jo 1:30, 42 4:10 5:33, 39, 44, Ac 4:7, Eph 5:32; so also perhaps σὺ εἶπας, Mt 26:64, al. (M, Pr., 86); before voc., Mt 2:6, Lk 1:76, Jo 17:5, al.; sometimes without emphasis (M, Pr., 85f.), as also

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

σύ, pron. of the second pers. (Dor. and Aeol. τύ, Boeot. Tov), gen. σοῦ, dat. σοί, ace. σέ (which oblique cases are enclitic, unless a preposition precede; yet πρός σε is written [uniformly in Ree. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18), in Grsb. (exe. Jn. xxi. 22, 23), in Treg. (exc. Mt. xxvi. 18; Acts xxiii. 30), in Lchm. (exe. Mt. xxvi.18; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; xxi. 22, 23; Acts xxiii. 30), in Tdf. (exe. Mt. xxvi. 18; Lk. i. 19; Jn. xvii. 11, 13; Jn. xxi. 22; Acts xxiii. 18, 30; 1 Tim. iii. 14; Tit. iii. 12); also by WH in Mt. xxv. 39], see ἐγώ, 2; Lipsius, Grammat. Untersuch. p. 62 sq. [W. §6, 3; B. 31 (27)]); plur. ὑμεῖς, εἴς. : Lat. tu, ete., vos, ete.; thou, ete., ye,ete. The nominatives ov and ὑμεῖς are expressed for emphasis — before a vocative, as σὺ Βηθλεέμ, Mt. ii. 6; σὺ παιδίον (Leian. dial. deor. 2, 1), Lk. i. 76; add, Jn. xvii. 5; Acts i. 24; 1 Tim. vi. 11, etc.; ὑμεῖς of Φαρισαῖοι, Lk. xi. 39…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

σύ (su) — you.

σύ [ῠ],

thou: pronoun of the second person:—Epic dialect nominative τύνη [ῡ] [Refs 8th c.BC+] (Laconian dialect τούνη [Refs 5th c.AD+]; Aeolic dialect σύ [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τύ [ῠ] [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τού [short syllable] [Refs 6th c.BC+] (also τούν [Refs]σύ, [Refs 8th c.BC+]—Gen. σοῦ, [Refs], elsewhere only Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; enclitic σου, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (also in Lyric poetry, [Refs 8th c.BC+] (which also occurs in Lyric poetry, [Refs 7th c.BC+], and as enclitic σευ, [Refs 8th c.BC+], σεο (enclitic) [Refs] σευ (enclitic) [Refs]:—Doric dialect τεῦ, τευ, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; rarely τέο, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Boeotian dialect τεῦς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; Doric dialect τεοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τοι variant in [Refs]; enclitic τεος [Refs 5th c.BC+]; other Doric dialect forms are τίω, τίως, both [Refs 3rd c.BC+]—Dat. σοί, [Refs 8th c.BC+]…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

σύ

su

the person pronoun of the second person singular; thou:-- thou. See

also 4571, 4671, 4675; and for the plural 5209, 5210, 5213, 5216.

see GREEK for 4675

see GREEK for 4571

see GREEK for 4671

see GREEK for 5209

see GREEK for 5210

see GREEK for 5213

see GREEK for 5216

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

σύ, σοῦ, σοί, σέ

Pers.pr.

you

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

σύ sy 2x

you, gen., σοῦ, dat., σοί, acc., σέ, Mt. 1:20; 2:6

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Pron-2GP — Personal pronoun · second person · genitive · plural
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

P-2GP Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Person: second Case: Genitive Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
78%you
you78% · 2412×you yourselves7% · 221×you yourself5% · 168×your3% · 87×other renderings3% · 96×other renderings3% · 89×

3,073 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject28%object24%adverbial23%indirect object20%predicate5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,892 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
λέγωI say, speak
ἀμήνHebrδέbut, on the otheἐγώ
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐγώοὕτωthus, so, in thiμήNeg
ἐν
Article theεἰμίI am, existγίνομαιI come into bein
πρός
ἔρχομαιI come, goἐγώπέμπωI send
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakπαρακαλέωI summon, entreaθέλωI will, wish, de
σύof you2892×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἐνἁμαρτίαa sin
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theεἰρήνηpeace, peace of οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐν
ἐν
Article theποῖοςIrgΧριστόςanointed, the Me

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceσύ · 2,892× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Acts Mark 2 Corinthians 1 Corinthians Romans 1 Thessalonians Revelation Hebrews Colossians

16 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 450 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.48c. AD 40

„οὐ φυτεύσεις σεαυτῷ ἄλσος, πᾶν ξύλον παρὰ τὸ θυσιαστήριον κυρίου τοῦ θεοῦ σου οὐ ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ“ (Deuter.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.101c. AD 75–95

παύσομαι δὲ τοῦ λοιποῦ μετὰ τοσαύτης ὀργῆς τὰς τιμωρίας ἐπὶ τοῖς ἀδικήμασιν εἰσπραττόμενος καὶ πολὺ μᾶλλον σοῦ παρακαλοῦντος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 35Ptolemais - Akko (Syrien)103 BC

τοῦ ἀποδοθῆι τὸν ἐπεσταλμένον ἡμῖν κατὰ μῆνα πυρὸν τοῖς παρʼ ἡμῶν. διʼ ἄλλων γεγράφαμεν ὑμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν βουλόμεθα μηδεμιᾶς προσφωνήσεως προσπεπτωκυίας. ἑαυτῶν δὲ ἐπιμελόμενοι ἵνʼ ὑγιαίνητε, — ἔσμεν ἐν

P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

η Φατρήους καὶ … χαίρειν καὶ ἐρρωμένοις διευτυχεῖν. ἐρρώμεθα δὲ καὶ αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν τὴν ἀρίστην μνείαν ποιούμενοι παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ

P.Grenf. 1 41Thebais3 BC

παρὰ Πετεύριος διεθέντος μου ὑπάρξει σοι εἰς στέφανον χαλκοῦ τάλαντα δεκάπεντε, τάλαντα ιε. εὐτύχει .

Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
λέγοντεςlegō saying G3004 Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
2,255× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means to say or speak, and it is used by Jesus and others in the New Testament to share teachings and tell stories. It appears in Matthew 9:34 and John 1:29.
Tyndale gloss
to say
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

λέγω (legō) is a primary Greek verb meaning 'to say' or 'to speak.' It encompasses a range of uses, including expressing thoughts, making declarations, and narrating events. The New Testament frequently employs it in direct speech and as a way to convey meaning, such as in Matthew 27:11. Abbott-Smith notes its distinction from similar verbs like λαλέω.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — λαλέω, λέγω, λαλιά, λόγος from a scan

In dealing with synonyms of the N. T. we plainly need not concern ourselves with such earlier, or even contemporary, uses of the words which we are discriminating, as lie altogether outside of the N. T. sphere, when these uses do not illustrate, and have not affected, their Scriptural employment. It follows from this that all those contemptuous uses of λαλεῖν as to talk at random, as one ἀθυρόστομος, or with no door to his lips, might do; of λαλιά, as chatter («Kpacia λόγου ἄλογος, Plato, Defin. 416)—for I cannot believe that we are to find this at John iv. 42—may be dismissed and set aside. The antithesis in the line of Eupolis (Meineke, /ragm. Com. Gr. p. 174), Λαλεῖν ἄριστος, ἀδυνατώτατος λέγειν, does little or nothing to illustrate the matter in hand. The distinction which indeed exists between the words may in this way be made clear. There are two leading aspects under which speech…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

λέγω,

[in LXX very freq., chiefly for אמר; λέγει for נְאֻם, Ge 22:16, al.;]

in Hom., to pick out, gather, reckon, recount.

In Hdt. and Att., to say, speak, affirm, declare: absol., Ac 13:15 24:10; seq. orat. dir., Mt 9:34, Mk 3:11, Jo 1:29, al.; seq. ὅτι recit., Mk 3:21, Lk 1:24, Jo 6:14, al.; acc. et. inf., Lk 11:18, Jo 12:29, al.; after another verb of speaking, προσφωνεῖν κ. λέγειν, Mt 11:17, al.; ἀπεκρίθη (ἐλάλησεν) λέγων (καὶ λέγει; Dalman…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

λέγω (in the N. T. only the pres. and impf. act. and pres. pass. are in use; 3 pers. plur. impf. ἔλεγαν, Jn. xi. 56 Tdf. [ef. ἔχω, init.]): I. in its earliest use in Hom. to lay (like Lat. lego, Germ. legen; οἵ. J. G. Miiller in Theol. Stud. u. Krit. for 1835, p. 127 sqq.; Curtius § 538) ; to cause to lie down, put to sleep; 1. to collect, gather; to pick out. 2. lo lay with, count with; to enumerate, recount, narrate, describe; [οἷ. Eng. tale, Germ. ztihlen). II. to put word to word in speaking, join words together, i. e. to say (how it differs fr. λαλεῖν, see under that word ad init.) ; once so by Hom. in 1]. 2, 222 [yet ef. Schmidt, Syn. i. ch. 1, §§ 20; 48, 2; L. and S. s. vy. B. II. 2]; often in Pind., and by far the most com. use in Attic; Sept. more than thirteen hundred times for 728; often also for D8} (saying, dictum); very rarely for 1393; and soin N.T. 1. univ. a. absol. to…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

λέγω. (1). “‘I say, speak”: see e.g. P Par 47 {= Selections, Ῥ- 21 ff.), ¢. B.C. 153, which is addressed on the verso—mpds τοὺς τὴν ἀλήθεαν λέγοντες (—-as), P Fay 12378 (c. A.D. 100) γνώσομαι yap εἰ ἀληθῶς λέγι, “1 will find out whether he is speaking the truth,” P Ryl 11. 7615 (late li/A.D.) ἃ καὶ ἀναγνώσομαι λεγομένου τοῦ [π]ράγματος, “1 will read them when the case is argued” (Edd.), P Flor II. 1327 (A.D. 257) ἔλεζξ]αν πεποιηκέναι ταῦτα ἀγνοίᾳ, ‘they said they had done this in ignorance,” and the magical P Par 5741238 (iii/A.D.) (= Selectzons, p. 113) λόγος λεγόμενος ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ, ‘ invocation to be uttered over the head (of the possessed one).”” For the phrase τὸ αὐτὸ λέγειν, cf. I Cor 11°, Weiss (Meyer 15 ad 1) cites a sepulchral inscr. of husband and wife from Rhodes, /J/Ae 149 (ii/B.c.) ταὐτὰ λέγοντες ταὐτὰ φρονοῦντες ἤλθομεν τὰν ἀμέτρητον ὁδὸν εἰς ᾿Αἴδαν. (2). Closely…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

λέγω (legō) — to say.

λέγω,

__B pick up, etc.: tenses for signification 1 and 11, future λέξω [Refs 8th c.BC+]: aorist ἔλεξα [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—middle, future in passive sense λέξομαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἐλεξάμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect ἐλέγμην [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—passive, aorist ἐλέχθην [Refs 8th c.BC+]-; post-[Refs 8th c.BC+]perfect εἴλοχα (κατ-, συν-), passive εἴλεγμαι, in these senses rarely λέλεγμαι (see. the compounds); also future λεγήσομαι (συλ-): aorist 2 ἐλέγην (κατ-, συν-):—gather, pick up, ὀστέα.. λέγωμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αἱμασιάς τε λέγων picking out stones for building walls, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—middle, gather for oneself, ἐπὶ δὲ ξύλα πολλὰ λέγεσθε [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

λέγω

lego

a primary verb; properly, to "lay" forth, i.e. (figuratively) relate

(in words (usually of systematic or set discourse; whereas 2036 and

5346 generally refer to an individual expression or speech

respectively; while 4483 is properly to break silence merely, and 2980

means an extended or random harangue)); by implication, to mean:--ask,

bid, boast, call, describe, give out, name, put forth, say(-ing, on),

shew, speak, tell, utter.

see GREEK for 2036

see GREEK for 5346

see GREEK for 4483

see GREEK for 2980

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

λέγω

v.

I say, speak

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

λέγω legō 2x

to lay, to arrange, to gather; to say, Mt. 1:20; to speak, make an address or speech, Acts 26:1; to say mentally, in thought, Mt. 3:9; Lk. 3:8; to say in written language, Mk. 15:28; Lk. 1:63; Jn. 19:37; to say, as distinguished from acting, Mt. 23:3; to mention, speak of, Mk. 14:71; Lk. 9:31; Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAP-NPM — Verb · present · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
35%saying
saying35% · 480×says13% · 175×i say12% · 164×he says9% · 122×say5% · 70×he was saying3% · 42×they say2% · 31×other renderings17% · 225×other renderings4% · 48×

1,357 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 107 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb98%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,255 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
αὐτός
πρόςμαθητήςa learner, disciἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theοὗτοςἐγώ
ἸησοῦςJesus
Article theδέbut, on the otheγόνυa knee
ἀμήνHebr
ἀμήνHebrαὐτόςλέγωI say, speak
λέγωsaying2255×
what comes after →
αὐτός
Article theτίςIrgκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
Article the
μαθητήςa learner, disciἸησοῦςJesusΠέτροςPeter
σύ
ὅτιthat, since, becοὐNegἐάνCond
δέbut, on the other ha
Article theπρόςαὐτός
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theοὗτοςσύ

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceλέγω · 2,255× in the New Testament
Luke John Matthew Mark Acts Revelation Hebrews Romans 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians James Galatians

76 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament25 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 1,290 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas The Epistle of Barnabas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 5c. AD 40

οὐ μὴν διὰ τοῦθ’ ἡσυχαστέον, ἀλλ’ ἕνεκα τοῦ θεοφιλοῦς καὶ ὑπὲρ δύναμιν ἐπιτολμητέον λέγειν, οἴκοθεν μὲν οὐδέν, ὀλίγα δ’ ἀντὶ πολλῶν, ἐφ’ ἃ τὴν ἀνθρωπίνην διάνοιαν φθάνειν εἰκὸς ἔρωτι καὶ πόθῳ σοφίας κατεσχημένην.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.4c. AD 100

πεφανέρωκεν γὰρ ἡμῖν διὰ πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, ὅτι οὕτε θυσιῶν οὔτε ὁλοκαυτωμάτων οὔτε προσφορῶν χρῄζει, λέγων ὅτε μέν:

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 1st c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Grenf. 2 33Pathyris101 BC

τὸ ἐπιβάλλον αὐτῷ μέρος ἧς ἐμισθώσατο σὺν Πακοίβι Σχώτου καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων ,

P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἑτερᾶς· νότου γῆ Τακοίμιος, βορρᾶ γῆ Χενσθώτου, ἀπηλιώτου Ἀείους, λιβὸς περίχωμα, τῆς δʼ ἄλλης λεγομένης Πκρώ· νότου γῆ Σενπελαίας, βορρᾶ γῆ Πανᾶτος ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός, λιβὸς Ἀραμείους, ἢ οἳ ἂν

P.Adl. 16Pathyris100 BC

οἱ Φίβιος τοῦ Πανεχάτου υἱοί, ἀπηλιώτου ὁδὸς βασιλική, λιβὸς γῆ Ψεμμώνθου τοῦ Πανεχάτου, ἄλλης λεγομένης Φαμούνιος νότου γῆ Παθώτου τοῦ Πατοῦτος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πατσεοῦτος τοῦ Φίβιος, ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός, λιβὸς

Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
περιτέμνεσθαιperitemnō to be circumcised G4059 Verb · present · passive · infinitive
17× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Acts than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means to circumcise, or cut around, specifically referring to the Jewish practice of circumcising males. It is used in Luke 1:59 to describe the circumcision of John the Baptist. In Acts 15:1, it describes the controversy over whether Gentile Christians must be circumcised.
Tyndale gloss
to circumcise
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

περιτέμνω is a verb meaning to cut around, specifically to circumcise. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, notably in Luke and Acts, referring to the Jewish rite of circumcision. The term can also be used metaphorically, as seen in Colossians, where it signifies a spiritual cutting away of sin. The word is derived from the combination of a prefix meaning 'around' and a root meaning 'to cut'.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

περι-τέμνω,

[in LXX chiefly for מוּל;]

(Ion., Epic. and late writers),

to cut around (Hdt.), hence, to circumcise (π. τὰ αἰδοῖα, Hdt.): Lk 1:59 2:21, Jo 7:22, Ac 7:8 15:5 16:3 21:21. Pass. and mid., to be circumcised, receive circumcision: Ac 15:1, I Co 7:18, Ga 2:3 5:2, 3 6:12, 13. Metaph. (cf. De 10:16, Je 4:4, al.), Col 2:11 (v. Deiss., BS, 151 f.; MM, xix).†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

περι-τέμνω (lon. περιτάμνω) ; 2 pres. περιτέμνομαι; pf. ptep. περιτετμημένος ; 1 aor. περιεἐτμήθην; [fr. Hes. down]; Sept. chiefly for 539; to cut around (cf. περί, III. 1]: τινά, to circumcise, cut off one’s prepuce (used of that well-known rite by which not only the male children of the Israelites, on the eighth day after birth, but subsequently also ‘proselytes of righteousness’ were consecrated to Jehovah and introduced into the number of his people; [ef. BB. DD. s. v. Circumcision; Oehler’s O. T. Theol. (ed. Day) 88 87, 88; Miller, Barnabasbrief, p. 227 sq.]), Lk. i. 59; ii. 21; Jn. vii. 22; Acts vii. 8; xv.53 xvi. 3; xxi. 21; of the same rite, Diod. 1,28; pass. and mid. to get one’s self circumcised, present one’s self to be circumcised, receive circumcision [ef. W. § 38, 3]: Acts xv. 1, 24 Rec.; 1 Co. vii. 18; Gal. ii. 3; v.2sq.; vi. 12sq.; with ra αἰδοῖα added, Hat. 2, 36 and…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

περιτέμνω is always used in the LXX for the ceremonial act of circumcision, and Deissmann (4S p. 151 ff.) has suggested that the choice of this particular compound by the LXX translators may have been due to the fact that it was ‘‘in common use as a technical term for an Egyptian custom similar to the Old Testament cércumczsion.” He cites by , περιτρέπω way of illustration P Lond 2413 (B.c. 163) (=I. p. 32, UPZ i. p. 117) ὡς ἔθος ἐστὶν] τοῖς Αἰγυπτίοις περι[[τε]]τέμνεσθαι (see further below), and BGU I. 3471} (a.p. 171) where we read of a boy—rrepit]pnOqvat [kata] τὸ ἔθος. To this evidence we can now add a series of documents dealing with the priests of Soknebtunis, P Tebt II. 291-3: see especially 292 (a.p. 189-190), where a priest makes request to the strategus that κατὰ τὸ ἔθος ἐπιϊστολὴν.. .7 γραφῆναι ὑπὸ σοῦ t[¢ κρατίστῳ ἀρχιερεῖ ἵνα] συνχωρήσαντος αὐτοῦ δυν[ηθῶσιν οἱ παῖδες]…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

περιτέμνω (peritemnō) — to circumcise.

περιτέμνω,

Epic dialect and Ionic dialect περι-τάμνω, cut or clip round about, οἴνας περιταμνέμεν prune them, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of a goldsmith, [Refs 2nd c.AD+] —middle, βραχίονας περιτάμνονται make incisions all over their arms, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, to be cut up, of fish, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. of circumcision, τῶν ἐπιγινομένων οὐ περιτάμνουσι τὰ αἰδοῖα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. τοὺς παῖδας [LXX+3rd c.BC+], etc.:— middle, περιτάμνονται τὰ αἰδοῖα [LXX+5th c.BC+]: absolutely, practise circumcision, [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, [LXX]

3. cut off the extremities, τὰ ὦτα καὶ τὴν ῥῖνα [Refs 5th c.BC+] —passive, περιτάμνεσθαι γῆν to be curtailed of certain land, [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

περιτέμνω

peritemno

from 4012 and the base of 5114; to cut around, i.e. (specially) to

circumcise:--circumcise.

see GREEK for 4012

see GREEK for 5114

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

περιτέμνω

v.

I circumcise

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

περιτέμνω peritemnō 17x

to cut around; to circumcise, remove the prepuce, Lk. 1:59; 2:21; met. Col. 2:11; mid. to submit to circumcision, Acts 15:1

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

περιτέμνω ionic -τάμνω fut. -τεμῶ perf. -τέτμηκα aor2 -έτεμον to cut or clip round about, Lat. circumcidere, οἰνὰς περιταμνέμεν to prune them, Hes.; τὴν κεφαλὴν π. κύκλῳ περὶ τὰ ὦτα Hdt.:—Mid., περιτάμνεσθαι βραχίονας to make incisions all round one's arms, id. Hdt.

of circumcision, id. Hdt.: and in Mid., περιτάμνονται τὰ αἰδοῖα they practise circumcision, id. Hdt.

to cut off the extremities, τὰ ὦτα καὶ τὴν ῥῖνα id. Hdt.:—Pass., περιτάμνεσθαι γῆν to be curtailed of certain land, id. Hdt.

to cut off and hem in all round, cut off, Lat. intercipere; hence in Mid., βοῦς περιταμνόμενος cutting off cattle for oneself, "lifting" cattle, Od.:—Pass. to be cut off, intercepted, Xen.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PPN — Verb · present · passive · infinitive
present passive infinitive — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PPN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Passive Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5745

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
22%circumcise
circumcise22% · 4×be circumcised22% · 4×circumcised11% · 2×you shall become circumcised11% · 2×being circumcised11% · 2×he circumcised6% · 1×he should d be circumcise6% · 1×you were circumcised6% · 1×other renderings6% · 1×

18 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 9 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb82%adverbial6%object6%indirect object6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 17 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
μήNeg
ἐάνCondλέγωI say, speakτὶς
Article the
ὀκτώIndecγάρfor
καίand, even, also, nam
ἸσαάκPropὅς
σύ
ἀναγκάζωI force, compelθέλωI will, wish, de
ἔρχομαιI come, go
ὄγδοοςeighth
περιτέμνωto be circumcised17×
what comes after →
αὐτός
Article theκαίand, even, also,παραγγέλλωI notify, comman
Article the
παιδίονa little child, ἔθοςa custom
ἄνθρωποςa man, one of the hu
τὶς
καλέωI call, invite,
Χριστόςanointed, the Messia
σύ

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπεριτέμνω · 17× in the New Testament
Galatians Acts 1 Corinthians Luke Colossians John
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 22 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus The Epistle of Barnabas Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Migration of Abraham 92c. AD 40

μηδ’ ὅτι τὸ περιτέμνεσθαι ἡδονῆς καὶ παθῶν πάντων ἐκτομὴν καὶ δόξης ἀναίρεσιν ἀσεβοῦς ἐμφαίνει, καθ’ ἣν ὑπέλαβεν ὁ νοῦς ἱκανὸς εἶναι γεννᾶν δι’ ἑαυτοῦ, ἀνέλωμεν τὸν ἐπὶ τῇ περιτομῇ τεθέντα νόμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.192c. AD 75–95

προσέταξέ τε βουλόμενος τὸ ἀπʼ αὐτοῦ γένος μένειν τοῖς ἄλλοις οὐ συμφυρόμενον περιτέμνεσθαι τὰ αἰδοῖα καὶ τοῦτο ποιεῖν ὀγδόῃ ἡμέρᾳ μετὰ τὸ γεννηθῆναι.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 9.1c. AD 100

Λέγει γὰρ πάλιν περὶ τῶν ὠτίων, πῶς περιέτεμεν ἡμῶν τὴν καρδίαν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 2nd c. BC 4th c. AD
Chrest.Wilck. 77Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 149

καὶ τῶν συννάων θεῶν ἱεροῦ λογίμου κώμης Σοκνοπαίου Νήσου ἐπέδωκάν μοι βιβλίδιον βουλόμενοι ἱερατικῶς περιτεμεῖν οἱ μὲν υἱοὺς ἑαυτῶν, οἱ δὲ συνγενεῖς ἐκ μητέρων τῶν ὑπογεγραμμένων καὶ παρέθεντο ἀντίγραφα

Stud.Pal. 22 51Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 153

Κλαύδιος Ἀγαθοκλῆς ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἱερέων σημειωσάμενος τὴν ἐπιστολὴν ἐπέτρεψε τὸν Στοτοῆν περιτμηθῆναι κατὰ τὸ ἔθος.

P.Rain.Cent. 58Soknopaiu Nesos (Arsinoites)AD 156

θεῶν ἱεροῦ λογίμου τοῦ ὄντος ἐν κώμῃ Σοκνοπαίου Νήσου ἐπέδωκέ μοι βιβλίδιον βουλόμενος ἱερατικῶς περιτεμεῖν υἱοὺς αὐτοῦ δύο Πακῦσιν καὶ Στοτοῆτιν ἐκ μητρὸς Ταφιώμιος ἱερείας τῶν αὐτῶν θεῶν· εἰς

Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
Article theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
Article the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
Article theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
Article theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
τηρεῖνtēreō to keep G5083 Verb · present · active · infinitive
71× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means to keep or observe something, like watching over it to keep it safe. Jesus uses it in John 17:11-12 to ask God to keep his followers safe. The Bible translates it as 'hold fast' or 'keep'.
Tyndale gloss
to keep: observe
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

τηρέω is a verb meaning to watch over, guard, or keep. It encompasses a range of meanings including observing, preserving, and maintaining, often with a sense of careful attention. The New Testament uses it in various contexts, such as keeping commandments (e.g., Mt 19:17) and guarding one's faith (e.g., 2 Tim 4:7). It is related to the idea of custody and protection.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

τηρέω, -ῶ

[in LXX for שָׁמַר, נָצַר, etc. ;]

to watch over, guard, keep, preserve: Mt 27:36, Ac 16:23, al.; ἑαυτόν, II Co 11:9, I Ti 5:22, Ja 1:27, Ju 21; seq. εἰς, Jo 12:7, Ac 25:21, I Pe 1:4, II Pe 2:4, 9 3:7, Ju 6; ἐν, Jo 17:11, 12, Ju 21; ἐκ, Jo 17:15, Re 3:10; τ. πίστιν, II Ti 4:7, Re 14:12; τ. ἑνότητα τ. πνεύματος, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

τηρέω, -ῶ; impf. ἐτήρουν; fut. τηρήσω; 1 aor. ἐτήρησα; pf. τετήρηκα, 3 pers. plur. τετηρήκασιν (Jn. xvii. 6 RG) and τετήρηκαν (ibid. LT Tr WH, [see γίνομαι, init.]) ; Pass., pres. τηροῦμαι; impf. ἐτηρούμην ; pf. τετήρημαι; 1 aor. ἐτηρήθην ; (τηρός, found only once, Aeschyl. suppl. 248, where it is doubtful whether it means ‘ guarding’ or ‘watching ’), fr. Pind., Soph., Thuc. down; Sept. several times for Dv, 1¥i, etc.; to attend to carefully, take care of; i.e. a. prop. to guard: twa, a prisoner, Mt. xxvii. 36, 54; Acts xvi. 23; pass., Acts xii. 5; [xxiv. 23]; xxv. 4, 21 ["]; ri, xii. 6; of τηροῦντες, [(R.V.) the watchers] the guards, Mt. xxviii. 4 (Cant. iii.3). Ὁ. metaph. to keep: τινά, one in that state in which he is, τὴν ἑαυτοῦ παρθένον, his own virgin daughter, sc. as a Virgin i. 6. unmarried, 1 Co. vii. 37; ἑαυτόν, himself such as he is, i. 6. begotten of God, 1 Jn. v. 18 [but…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

τηρέω (1) lit. “watch,” ‘‘observe”: P Tebt II. 2784% (early i/A.D.) τηρῖ ple] γάρ, “for he watches me (?)” (Edd.). (2) “‘cuard,” ‘ protect”: PSI III. 168° (B.c. 118) τηροῦντός μου σὺν ἄλλοις ἐπὶ τοῦ ἐμ Iloxpiper βασιλικοῦ χώματος, P Oxy VI. 985 (accounts—2"¢ half i/a.D.) ἐργάτηι τηροῦντι τὸν οἶνον... (δραχμαὶ) δ. (3) “keep,” ‘‘preserve”: BGU IV. 114125 (B.c. 13) κἀγὼ τὴν φιλίαν σου θέλων ἄμεμπτίον] ἐματὸν ἐτήρησα (cf. 1 Thess 5"), P Oxy XIV. 175725 (ii/A.D., after Hadrian) κόμισαι παρὰ Θέωνος μάνια (‘‘ vessels?) δύο kal τήρησόν por αὐτὰ ἕως ἀναβῶ, 20. IIT. 53315. (ii/iili A.D.) ἵνα τηρήσωσι αὐτῶν τὴν δεξιάν, ““{Παΐ they should keep their pledge,” 2. VIII. 11601® (iii/iv A.D.) τὰ σεσύλληχα δὲ κέρμα {ταῦ τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “I am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.), and 75. X. 12987 (iv/A.D.) ἐγὼ μόνος (1 μόνον 9) πάνυ ἐμαυτὸν τηρῶν imp τὸν ἀσφαλήν, “I have…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

τηρέω (tēreō) — to keep: observe.

τηρ-έω

(τη- also in Doric dialect, [Refs 7th c.BC+], perfect τετήρηκα [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—watch over, take care of, guard, δώματα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; rarely of persons, δαιμόνων.., αἵτινες τηροῦμεν ὑμᾶς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τ. τὴν ἀρχήν maintain it, [Refs 2nd c.BC+] —passive, τὸ ἔξωθεν [τεῖχος] ἐτηρεῖτο was constantly guarded, [Refs 5th c.BC+]future middle τηρήσομαι in passive sense, [Refs]

2. τ. ὅπως.. ἔσται take care that.. , [Refs 4th c.BC+]; τ. μὴ.. cavere ne.. , [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also in middle, τηρώμεσθ᾽, ὅπως μὴ.. αἰσθήσεται [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. τηρεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ πυρός protect them from the fire, i.e. cook them slowly, Bilabel Ὀψαρτ.[Refs]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

τηρέω

tereo

from teros (a watch; perhaps akin to 2334); to guard (from loss or

injury, properly, by keeping the eye upon; and thus differing from

5442, which is properly to prevent escaping; and from 2892, which

implies a fortress or full military lines of apparatus), i.e. to note

(a prophecy; figuratively, to fulfil a command); by implication, to

detain (in custody; figuratively, to maintain); by extension, to

withhold (for personal ends; figuratively, to keep unmarried); by

extension, to withhold (for personal ends; figuratively, to keep

unmarried):--hold fast, keep(- er), (pre-, re-)serve, watch.

see GREEK for 2334

see GREEK for 5442

see GREEK for 2892

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

τηρέω

v.

I keep, guard, observe

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

τηρέω tēreō 70x

to keep watch upon, guard, Mt. 27:36, 54; 28:4; Acts 12:6; to watch over protectively, guard, 1 Jn. 5:18; Rev. 16:15; to mark attentively, to heed, Rev. 1:3; to observe practically, keep strictly, Mt. 19:17; 23:3; 28:20; Mk. 7:9; Jn. 8:51; to preserve, shield, Jn. 17:15; to store up, reserve, Jn. 2:10; 12:7; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

τηρέω τηρέω, φυτ. -ήσω

τῆρος to watch over, protect, guard, Pind., Ar.:—Pass. to be constantly guarded, Thuc.; fut. mid. τηρήσομαι in pass. sense, id. Thuc.

to take care that . . , Arist., Ar., Plat.

to give heed to, watch narrowly, observe, Ar.; τὰς ἁμαρτίας Thuc.

to watch for, c. acc., Soph., Ar.; παραστείχοντα τηρήσας having watched for him as he was passing by, Soph.

absol. to watch, keep watch, Arist.:—c. inf. to watch or look out, so as to . . , Thuc.

to observe or keep an engagement, Isocr., etc.; τ. εἰρήνην Dem.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-PAN — Verb · present · active · infinitive
present active infinitive — an action in progress.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-PAN Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: iNfinitive TVM equivalent: G5721

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
15%keep
keep15% · 11×keeping15% · 11×do keep7% · 5×kept3% · 2×be kept3% · 2×will keep3% · 2×may keep3% · 2×being kept3% · 2×other renderings49% · 36×

73 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 40 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 71 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ποιέωI do, makeἐγώτηρέωI keep, guard, o
Article the
καίand, even, also,σείωI shakeαὐτός
αὐτός
ἐντολήan ordinance, inμετάδιδάσκωI teach
ἐγώ
λόγοςa word, speech, ἐνταφιασμόςembalming, prepaἐντολήan ordinance, in
σύ
παράδοσιςan instruction, ἐλάσσωνless, smaller, iλόγοςa word, speech,
τηρέωto keep71×
what comes after →
Article the
ἐντολήan ordinance, inλόγοςa word, speech, ἑαυτοῦ
αὐτός
ἐνἐκεῖthere, yonder, tἐκεῖνος
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theγίνομαιI come into beinμένωI remain, abide
ἐν
Article theοὐρανόςthe sky, the hea
κατά
δέbut, on the othe

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceτηρέω · 71× in the New Testament
John Revelation Acts 1 John Matthew Jude 2 Peter 1 Timothy 2 Corinthians James 1 Corinthians 1 Peter
Across the New Testament16 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 18 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.65c. AD 40

αὐτός σου τηρήσει κεφαλήν, καὶ σὺ τηρήσεις αὐτοῦ πτέρναν“ (Gen.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.129c. AD 75–95

οὐ γὰρ ἐπιχώριος ἡμῖν ὁ τοιοῦτος αὐτῶν τύπος, ἀλλʼ ἕν τε αὐτῶν σχῆμα καὶ τελευτὴ μία, Νῶχός τέ τοι Νῶε καλεῖται καὶ τοῦτον τὸν τύπον ἐπὶ παντὸς τηρεῖ σχήματος.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 10.11c. AD 100

κολλᾶσθε μετὰ τῶν φοβουμένων τὸν κύριον, μετὰ τῶν μελετώντων ὃ ἔλαβον διάσταλμα ῥήματος ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ, μετὰ τῶν λαλούντων τὰ διδαιώματα κυρίου καὶ τηρούντων, μετὰ τῶν εἰδότων, ὅτι ἡ μελέτη ἐστὶν ἔργον εὐφροσύνης, καὶ ἀναμαρυκωμένων τὸν λόγον κυρίου.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 1st c. BC
SB 3 6823AD 41–AD 54

Καπίτων Τήρῃ τῷ φιλτάτῳ πλεῖστα χαίρειν. πρὸ μὲν πάντων ἐχάρην μεγάλως λαβών σου ἐπιστολήν, ὅτι ὑγιαίνεις

P.Tebt. 2 302Tebtynis (ArsinoitesAD 71–AD 72

ἀξιοῦμέν σε βεβαιῶσαι ἡμῖν τὴν γῆν τὴν ἀντὶ συντάξεως ἡμῖν ἐκ διαδοχῆς τῶν γονέων τετηρημένην … ἐκ πολλοῦ χρόνου αὐτουργούντων ἡμῶν σὺν γυναιξὶ καὶ τέκνοις ὅπως δυνώμεθα … ηναι

Aegyptus 67 (1987), p. 60-61 no. 55Talei (Arsinoites)AD 111–AD 112

ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐτοῦ … … … υ εἰς χρείαν … ι … δ τηρεῖν. ἔτους ιε Τραιανοῦ Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου

Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
τὸνho the G3588 Article · accusative · singular · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-ASM — Article · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-ASM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
Article theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,Article the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordance · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
νόμον,nomos law G3551 Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
194× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for law, referring to a set of rules or regulations, such as Moses' law or the law of Christ in Galatians 6:2.
Tyndale gloss
law
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

νόμος refers to a law or custom, derived from the idea of distribution. It encompasses various meanings, including general law, the Mosaic law, and Christian teachings. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts such as the law of Moses and principles of Christian conduct. Notably, it is used in verses like Romans 3:27 and Galatians 6:2.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

νόμος, -ου, ὁ

(< νέμω, to deal out, distribute),

[in LXX chiefly for תּוֹרָה, also for חֻקָּה, etc.;]

that which is assigned, hence, usage, custom, then law; in NT (only in Mt, Jo, Ja, and the Lucan and Pauline bks.);

of law in general: Ro 3:27 5:13b; pl., of divine laws, He 8:10 10:16; ὁ ν. τ. Χριστοῦ, Ga 6:2; (τ.) ἐλευθερίας, Ja 1:25 2:12; βασιλικιός (Hort., in l.; Deiss., LAE, 3673), Ja 2:8.

Of a force or influence impelling to action: Ro 7:21, 23a, 25 8:2.

Of the Mosaic law: Mt 5:18, Lk 2:27, Jo 1:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

νόμος, -ov, 6, (νέμω to divide, distribute, apportion), in prof. auth. fr. Hes. down, anything established, anything received by usage, a custom, usage, law; in Sept. very often for ΓΙ ΓΙ, also for 7p, ΠῚ, ete. In the N. T. a command, law; and 1. of any law whatsoever: διὰ ποίου νόμου; Ro. iii. 27; νόμος δικαιοσύνης, a law or rule producing a state approved of God, i. e. by the observance of which we are approved of God, Ro. ix. 31, ef. Meyer [see ed. Weiss], Fritzsche, Philippi ad loe.; α precept or injunction: κατὰ νόμον ἐντολῆς σαρκ. Heb. vii. 16; plur. of the things prescribed by the divine will, Heb. viii. 10; x. 16; νόμος τοῦ νοός, the rule of action prescribed by reason, Ro. vii. 23; the mention of the divine law causes those things even which in opposition to this law impel to action, and therefore seem to have the force of a law, to be designated by the term νόμος, as ἕτερος…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

νόμος (nomos) — law.

νόμος, ὁ,

(νέμω) that which is in habitual practice, use or possession, not in [Refs 8th c.BC+]

I. usage, custom, [Μοῦσαι] μέλπονται πάντων τε νόμους καὶ ἤθεα κεδνά [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἔνθα ν. (i.e. ἐστί) with infinitive, where it is the custom.., [Refs 7th c.BC+]; ν. πάντων βασιλεύς custom is lord of all, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: hence, law, ordinance, τόνδε.. ν. διέταξε Κρονίων.. θηρσὶ.. ἐσθέμεν ἀλλήλους [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ν. κοινός, ={ὀρθὸς λόγος}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

I. b in VT, of the law of God, ἐν τῷ νόμῳ Κυρίου τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ [LXX]; νόμον ὃν ἐνετείλατο ὑμῖν Μωϋσῆς[LXX]; so in NT, ὁ ν. Μωϋσέως [NT]; ὁ ν. τοῦ Πνεύματος τῆς ζωῆς, opposed to ὁ ν. τῆς ἁμαρτίας καὶ τοῦ θανάτου…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

νόμος

nomos

from a primary nemo (to parcel out, especially food or grazing to

animals); law (through the idea of prescriptive usage), genitive case

(regulation), specially, (of Moses (including the volume); also of the

Gospel), or figuratively (a principle):--law.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

νόμος, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a law, the Mosaic Law

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

νόμος nomos 194x

a law, Rom. 4:15; 1 Tim. 1:9; the Mosaic law, Mt. 5:17, et al. freq.; the Old Testament Scripture, Jn. 10:34; a legal tie, Rom. 7:2, 3; a law, a rule, standard, Rom. 3:27; a rule of life and conduct, Gal. 6:2, Jas. 1:25

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

νόμος anything assigned, a usage, custom, law, ordinance, Lat. institutum, Hes.; νόμος πάντων βασιλεύς custom is lord of all, Pind. ap. Hdt.; κατὰ νόμον according to custom or law, Hes., Hdt., attic; poet. κὰν νόμον Pind.:— παρὰ νόμον contrary to law, Aesch.:—dat. νόμῳ by custom, conventionally, opp. to φύσει, Hdt., Arist.:—at Athens νόμοι were Solon.'s laws, those of Draco being called θεσμοί.

ἐν χειρῶν νόμῳ by the law of force, in the fight or scuffle, Hdt.; ἐν χειρὸς νόμῳ in actual warfare, Arist.; also, ἐς χειρῶν νόμον ἀπικέσθαι to come to blows, Hdt.

a musical mode or strain, Aesch., Plat., etc.; νόμοι κιθαρῳδικοί Ar.

a song sung in honour of some god, Hdt.; νόμοι πολεμικοί war- tunes, Thuc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-ASM — Noun · accusative · singular · masculine
accusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-ASM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Easton's Bible Dictionary

Law

A rule of action. (1.) The Law of Nature is the will of God as to human conduct, founded on the moral difference of things, and discoverable by natural light (Rom. 1:20; 2:14, 15). This law binds all men at all times. It is generally designated by the term conscience, or the capacity of being influenced by the moral relations of things.

(2.) The Ceremonial Law prescribes under the Old Testament the rites and ceremonies of worship. This law was obligatory only till Christ, of whom these rites were typical, had finished his work (Heb. 7:9, 11; 10:1; Eph. 2:16). It was fulfilled rather than abrogated by the gospel.

(3.) The Judicial Law, the law which directed the civil policy of the Hebrew nation.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

The word is properly used, in Scripture as elsewhere, to express a definite commandment laid down by any recognized authority; but when the word is used with the article, and without any words of limitation, it refers to the expressed will to God, and in nine cases out of ten to the Mosaic law, or to the Pentateuch of which it forms the chief portion. The Hebrew word torah (law) lays more stress on its moral authority, as teaching the truth and guiding in the right way; the Greek nomos (law), on its constraining power as imposed and enforced by a recognized authority. The sense of the word, however, extends its scope and assumes a more abstracts character in the writings of St. Paul. Nomos , when used by him with the article, still refers in general to the law of Moses; but when used without the article, so as to embrace any manifestation of "law," it includes all powers which act on…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

In the Bible, signifies sometimes the whole word of God, Ps 19:7-11 119:1-176 Isa 8:20; sometimes the Old Testament, Joh 10:34 15:25, and sometimes the five books of Moses, which formed the first of the three divisions of the Hebrew Scriptures, Lu 24:44 Ac 13:15. The Pentateuch was probably "the law," a copy of which every king was to transcribe for himself and study, and which was to be made known to young and old, in public and in private, De 6:7 17:18,19 31:9-19,26. In other places the Mosaic institutions as a whole are intend by "the law," in distinction from the…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ General scriptures concerning Ps 19:7-9; 119:1-8; Pr 28:4,5; Mt 22:21; Lu 16:17; 20:22-25; Ro 2:14,15; 7:7,12,14; 13:10; 1Ti 1:5,8-10; Jas 1:25; 1Jo 3:4; 5:3

→ See LITIGATION

→ See COMMANDMENTS

→ See DUTY TO GOD

→ OF MOSES

→ (Contained in the books of Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers, and Deuteronomy)

Given at Sinai Ex 19; De 1:1; 4:10-13; 33:2; Hab 3:3

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
93%law
law93% · 184×the law2% · 4×other renderings3% · 6×other renderings2% · 3×

197 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial43%object22%subject22%predicate10%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 194 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
Article the
ἐνκατάἀπό
ὑπό
Article theεἰμίI am, existὡςas, like as, how
ἔργονwork, labor, action,
ἐκχωρίςapart from, with
γάρfor
Article theδιάἄχριas far as, up to
ἐν
γράφωI writeδύναμαιI am powerful, aὅσος
νόμοςlaw194×
what comes after →
Article the
θεόςGod, a godἁμαρτίαa sinπνεῦμαwind, breath, sp
καίand, even, also, nam
Article theοὐδείςno one, none, noπαρανομέωI act contrary t
ΜωϋσῆςMoses
καίand, even, also,ἐγώἀνάγωI lead up, put t
οὐNeg
δικαιόωI make righteousφθάνωI anticipate, prεἰμίI am, exist
ὅτιthat, since, because
Article theκαλόςbeautiful, good,ἐκ

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceνόμος · 194× in the New Testament
Romans Galatians Acts John Hebrews James 1 Corinthians Luke Matthew Philippians 1 Timothy Ephesians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament12 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 138 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 3c. AD 40

ἡ δ’ ἀρχή, καθάπερ ἔφην, ἐστὶ θαυμασιωτάτη κοσμοποιίαν περιέχουσα, ὡς καὶ τοῦ κόσμου τῷ νόμῳ καὶ τοῦ νόμου τῷ κόσμῳ συνᾴδοντος καὶ τοῦ νομίμου ἀνδρὸς εὐθὺς ὄντος κοσμοπολίτου πρὸς τὸ βούλημα τῆς φύσεως τὰς πράξεις ἀπευθύνοντος, καθ’ ἣν καὶ ὁ σύμπας…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.10c. AD 75–95

Εὗρον τοίνυν, ὅτι Πτολεμαίων μὲν ὁ δεύτερος μάλιστα δὴ βασιλεὺς περὶ παιδείαν καὶ βιβλίων συναγωγὴν σπουδάσας ἐξαιρέτως ἐφιλοτιμήθη τὸν ἡμέτερον νόμον καὶ τὴν κατʼ αὐτὸν διάταξιν τῆς πολιτείας εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα φωνὴν μεταβαλεῖν,

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.6c. AD 100

ταῦτα οὖν κατήργησεν, ἵνα ὁ καινὸς νόμος τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, ἄνευ ζυγοῦ ἀνάγκης ὤν, μὴ ἀνθρωποποίητον ἔχῃ τὴν προσφοράν.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD
P. Grenf. 1 21Pathyris127 BC

τῶι ἐξ ἐμοῦ ἐξ Σαραπιάδος τῆς Ἐσθλάδου τοῦ Θεωνος ἀστῆς ἧι συνήμην γυναικὶ κατὰ νόμους καὶ κατὰ διαθήκην τὴν κεχρηματισμένην διὰ τοῦ ἐν Διὸς πόλει τῆι μικρᾶι ἀρχείου ἐπὶ

ἔπιπλα καὶ κτήνη καὶ ὅσα ἂν προσεπικτήσωμαι Ταθώτηι Ἁρυώτου Περσίνῃ ᾗ σύνειμι γυναικὶ κατὰ νόμους, πλὴν στρώματος ἑνὸς καὶ κλείνης τορυνευτῆς α Πατ … ει καὶ Πετεσοράθηι τῶν Παχνούβιος

τῶν οἰκετικῶν σωμάτων, ἐν οἷς καὶ ἐπὶ τοῦ Κόχλακος τῆς Ἀραβίας τοῦ δηλουμένου Παθυρίτου νομοῦ μέρους ἡμίσους ἀπὸ ἐδάφους ἀμπελῶνος ἀρουρῶν β ἡμίσους ἢ ὅσαν ἂν ἦι ἐπὶ τὸ

Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
οἷςhos, hē to whom G3739 Relative pronoun · dative · plural · masculine
1,407× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The word which is a pronoun used to ask for or identify something, as seen in John 5:11. It can also be used to describe a person or thing, such as in Mark 15:23. This word helps to clarify or specify what is being talked about.
Tyndale gloss
which
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

ὅς is a pronoun meaning 'who,' 'which,' 'what,' or 'that.' It serves as both a demonstrative and a relative pronoun, agreeing in gender with its antecedent. The New Testament uses it in various constructions, including phrases like ὃς μὲν... ὃς δέ to indicate contrasting subjects. Notably, it can express purpose or cause in certain contexts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

the postpositive article (ἄρθρον ὑποτακτικόν).

As demonstr. pron. = οὗτος, ὅδε, this, that, also for αὐτός, chiefly in nom.: ὅς δέ, but he (cf. ἦ δὲ ὅς, freq. in Plat.), Mk 15:23, Jo 5:11; ὃς μὲν . . . ὃς δέ, the one . . . the other, Mt 21:35 22:5 25:15, Lk 23:33, Ac 27:14, Ro 14:5, I Co 11:21, II Co 2:16, Ju 22; neut., ὃ μὲν . . . ὃ δέ, the one . . . the other, some . . . some, Mt 13:8, 23, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὅς 455 ὅς iii. 5 [RG], 6; Heb. vi. 10; ix. 20; Jas. ii. 5; 1 In. iii. 24; Jude 15; for other exx. see below; ἐν ὥρᾳ 7 οὐ γινώoxet, Mt. xxiv. 50; τῇ παραδύσει 9 παρεδώκατε, Mk. vii. 13 ; add, Lk. ii. 20; v. 9; ix. 435 xii. 46; xxiv. 25; Jn. xvii. 5; Acts ii. 22; xvii. 31; xx. 38; 2 Co. xii. 21; 2Th.i. 4; Rev. xviii. 6; ef. W. § 24,1; [B. as above]. Rarely attraction oceurs where the verb governs the dative [but see below]: thus, κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσε θεοῦ for xarévavre θεοῦ, ᾧ ἐπίστευσε (See κατέναντι). Ro. iv. 17; φωνῆς, ἧς ἔκραξα (for 7 (al. ἥν, οἴ. W. 164 (154 sq.) Β. 287 (217)}7), Acts xxiv. 21, οἵ. Is. vi. 4; (7γετο δὲ καὶ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ τε πιστῶν, οἷς ἥδετο καὶ ὧν ἠπίστει πολλούς, for καὶ πολλοὺς τούτων, οἷς ἠπίστει, Xen. Cyr. ὅ, 4, 39; ὧν ἐγὼ ἐντετύχηκα οὐδείς; for οὐδεὶς τούτων, οἷς ἐντετ. Plato, Gorg. p. 509 ἃ.; Protag. p. 361 6.; derep.7 p.531e.; παρ᾽ ὧν βοηθεῖς, οὐδεμίαν λήψει…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ος is found as a demonstrative pronoun in P Ryl II. 14415 (complaint of assault—a.D. 38) ὃς δὲ ἐκ τοῦ ἐναντίου ἄλογον ἀηδίαν μοι ἐπιχειρήσας παρεχρήσατό μοι πολλὰ καὶ ἄσχημα, ‘“whereupon he opposing me made a brutal and odious attack upon me and subjected me to much shameful mishandling” (Edd.): cf. Mk 15%, Jn 51. For ὃς μέν... ὃς δέ, “the one . . the other,” as in Mt 21° a/., see P Oxy IX. 1189? (c. A.D. 117) ἐπιστολὰς δύο ds ἔγραψα ἣν μὲν σοὶ ἣν δὲ Σαβείνῳ, and for ὃς δέ solétarium see PSI. IV. 313° (iii/iv A.D.) with the editor’s note. Ὃς ἄν (ἐάν) c. conj. = ‘‘ whosoever ” may be illustrated Ly P Par 4622 (B.c. 153) (= Witkowski*, p. 87), περὶ dv ἂν βούληι γράφε, P Grenf I. 30% (B.c. 103) ἐφ} οἷς ἂν οὖν ὑμῶν προσδέωνται, P Oxy IV. 743%% (B.C. 2) ἐν ols ἐὰν σοῦ προσδέηται, °° ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐὰν θέλῃς. For the comparative usage of ὃς ἄν and ὃς ἐάν, see Thackeray Gr. i. p. 68, cited s.v. ἄν.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὅς (hos, hē) — which.

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ,

genitive οὗ, ἧς, οὗ, etc.; dative plural οἷς, αἷς, οἷς, etc.: Epic dialect forms, genitive ὅου (probably replacing Οο) in the phrases ὅου κλέος οὔ ποτ᾽ ὀλεῖται [Refs 8th c.BC+]; feminine ἕης [Refs 8th c.BC+]; elsewhere only ἧς [Refs]; dative plural οἷς, οἷσι, ᾗς, ᾗσι (never αἷς or αἷσι in [Refs 8th c.BC+] — _pronoun_ used,

__A as demonstrative by the side of οὗτος, ὅδε, and the Article ὁ, ἡ, τό: in post-Homeric Gr. this use survived only in a few special phrases.

__B as a Relat. by the side of the Article ὅ, ἥ, τό (see. ὁ, ἡ, τό, c):—this demonstrative and Relat. pronoun must not be confounded with the Possess. ὅς, ἥ, ὅν. (With Gr. Relat. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ cf. Sanskrit Relat. yas, yā, yad, Lithuanian jis, ji (he, she), Oslav. i, ja, je (he, she…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὅς ἥ ὅ

hos

he hay, and neuter

ho ho

probably a primary word (or perhaps a form of the article 3588); the

relatively (sometimes demonstrative) pronoun, who, which, what,

that:--one, (an-, the) other, some, that, what, which, who(-m, -se),

etc. See also 3757.

see GREEK for 3588

see GREEK for 3757

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὅς, ἥ, ὅ

Rel.pr.

who, which, what, that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὅς hos 1x

who, which, what, that, Mt. 1:16, 23, 25; in NT interrog. ἐφ’ ὅ, wherefore, why, Mt. 26:50; in NT ὅς μὲν ... ὅς δέ, for ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, Mt. 21:35; 2 Cor. 2:16

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Rel-DPM — Relative pronoun · dative · plural · masculine
dative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

R-DPM Part of Speech: Relative pronoun Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
25%which
which25% · 356×whom20% · 291×who17% · 238×that14% · 199×what8% · 117×whatever2% · 30×whose2% · 29×other renderings10% · 145×other renderings2% · 25×

1,430 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 60 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object40%subject29%adverbial26%indirect object3%predicate3%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,407 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ἐν
ἡμέραa dayαὐτόςἵναin order that, s
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςἔχωI have, hold, poυἱόςa son, descenden
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἀπόλλυμιI destroy, lose,δοῦλος (II)
διά
ἐκεῖνοςΧριστόςanointed, the Meαὐτός
εἰς
καίand, even, also,ἐγώοἰκίαa house, househo
ὅςto whom1407×
what comes after →
εἰμίI am, exist
Article theμεθερμηνεύωI translate, intκαίand, even, also,
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existἔξεστι(ν)it is permitted,γινώσκωI come to know,
Article the
θεόςGod, a godυἱόςa son, descendenκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
καίand, even, also, nam
σύποιέωI do, makeαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
ἄνDisjἑξήκονταIndecτριάκονταIndec

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὅς · 1,407× in the New Testament
Acts Luke John Matthew Romans Mark Hebrews Revelation 1 Corinthians 2 Corinthians Colossians Ephesians

22 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 33c. AD 40

ἵν’ οὖν μὴ αἰεὶ συμφερόμεναι στασιάζωσι καὶ πόλεμος ἀντ’ εἰρήνης ἐπικρατῇ τὴν ἀκοσμίαν ἐν κόσμῳ τιθείς, οὐ μόνον ἐχώρισε φῶς καὶ σκότος, ἀλλὰ καὶ ὅρους ἐν μέσοις ἔθετο διαστήμασιν, οἷς ἀνεῖρξε τῶν ἄκρων ἑκάτερον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

πῶς τὸ Σοδομιτῶν ἔθνος θεὸς κατεστρέψατο χολωθεὶς αὐτοῖς ἐφ' οἷς ἡμάρτανον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 4.8c. AD 100

Μωϋσῆ Μωϋσῆ, κατάβηθι τὸ τάχος, ὅτι ἠνόμησεν ὁ λαός σου, οὓς ἐξήγαγες ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, καὶ συνῆκεν Μωϋσῆς καὶ ἔριψεν τὰς δύο πλάκας ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ: καὶ συνετρίβη αὐτῶν ἡ διαθήκη, ἵνα ἡ τοῦ ἠγαπημένου Ἰησοῦ ἐγκατασφραγισθῇ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν ἡμῶν…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC
P.Grenf. 1 32Pelusion103 BC

θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ Ψενανοῦπιν καὶ … … ελθεῖν ἐπὶ προ … ους καὶ γραψάτωσαν ἡμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐσπούδασας διὰ τὰς ἡμῶν παρακλήσεις καὶ ση

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

ἐδάνεισεν Ὧρος Ὥρου Ὥρωι Νεχούτου ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως ὑποκλαστὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον πυροῦ ἀρτάβας τεσσαράκοντα ἓξ κριθῆς ἑξήκοντα ἐννέα , ἴσους ἀτόκους, ὧν ἀπόδοσιν

P.Adl. 17Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC

τῆς ἐπιγονῆς τῶν ἐκ Παθύρεως ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος μελίχρως τετανὸς ἀναφάλακρος μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν οὖς ἀριστερὸν τετρημένον χαλκοῦ ταλάντων πέντε . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην

Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
οὐou not G3756 Particle · negative
1,622× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
rarer in Acts than elsewhere in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This is a strong 'no', used to deny something completely. It appears in the New Testament, such as in Matthew 13:29 and John 1:21. It is a negative answer to a question.
Tyndale gloss
no
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word οὐ (transliterated as ou) is a primary negative particle meaning 'not' or 'no.' It is used to negate verbs or statements, often appearing in various forms depending on the following sound. In the New Testament, it frequently serves to deny facts and is distinct from another negative particle, μή (transliterated as ), which is used for prohibitions or wishes.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

οὐ, before a vowel with smooth breathing οὐκ, before one with rough breathing οὐχ (but improperly οὐχ ἰδού, Ac 2:7, WH, mg.; cf. WH, Intr., § 409; M, Pr., 44, 244),

[in LXX for לֹא, אַיִן, אֵין;]

neg. particle,

not, no, used generally c. indic. and for a denial of fact (cf . μή);

absol. (accented), οὔ, no: Mt 13:29, Jo 1:21 21:5; οὒ οὔ, Mt 5:37, Ja 5:12.

Most freq. negativing a verb or other word, Mt 1:25 10:26, 38, Mk 3:25 9:37, Jo 8:29, Ac 7:5, Ro 1:16, Phl 3:3, al.; in…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

οὐ before a consonant, οὐκ before a vowel with a smooth breathing, and ody before an aspirated vowel ; but sometimes in the best codd. οὐχ occurs even before a smooth breathing; accordingly LT WH mrg. have adopted οὐχ ἰδού, Acts ii. 7; LT οὐχ ᾿Ιουδαϊκῶς, Gal. ii. 14 (see WH. Introd. § 409); L οὐχ ὀλίγος, Acts xix. 23; οὐχ ἠγάπησαν, Rev. xii. 11; and contrariwise οὐκ before an aspirate, as οὐκ ἕστηκεν, Jn. viii. 44 T; [οὐκ ἕνεκεν, 2 Co. vii. 12 T]; (οὐκ εὗρον, Lk. xxiv. 3; [οὐκ ὑπάρχει, Acts iii. 6] in cod. x [alsoC*; ef. cod. Alex. in 1 ἔβαν. iv. 2,12; Job xix. 16; xxxviiil. 11, 26]); cf. W. $5, 14d. 14; Β. τ; [A. v. Schiitz, Hist. Alphab. Att., Berol. 1875, pp: 54-58 ; Sophocles, Hist. of Grk. Alphab., 1st ed. 1848, p- 64 sq. (on the breathing); Tdf Sept., ed. 4, Proleg. pp: Xxxiii. xxxiv.; Scrivener, Collation ete., 2d ed., p. lv. no. 9; id. cod. Bezae p. xlvii. no. 11 (ef. p. xlii.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ου to make the voyage” (Edd.), and P Amh II. 78?! (a.p. 184) τοιαύτης ο[ὖ]ν αὐθαδίας ἐν αὐτῷ οὔσης οὐ δυνάμενος [ἐν]καρτερεῖν ἐπιδίδωμι, ‘“ his audacity having reached this pitch I can endure no longer and present this petition.” See further Proleg. p. 231 f. In support of the translation ‘‘ I determined not to know” in 1 Cor 2, we may cite P Par 2657 (B.c. 163) (= UPZi. Ρ-. 248) οὐκ ἐκρίναμεν καταχωρῆσαι, ‘we determined not to record,” P Tebt I. 124° (c. B.c. 118) οὐκ (ἐκδρίναμεν ἐξαρ[ιθ]μεῖ[σθαι, “we determined not to be counted,” and the classical formula in P Hamb I. 27° (B.c. 250 (249)) οὐκ ἔφη εἰδέναι, ‘he said that he did not know.” The origin of the double negative οὐ μή is fully discussed by Moulton Pro/eg. p. 187 ff. When we pass to its actual occurrences in the NT, we find that these for the most part are found in passages derived from the OT and in the Sayings of our Lord…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

οὐ (ou) — no.

οὐ,

the negative of fact and statement, as μή of will and thought; οὐ denies, μή rejects; οὐ is absolute, μή relative; οὐ objective, μή subjective. —The same differences hold for all compounds of οὐ and μή, and some examples of οὐδέ and οὐδείς are included below.—As to the Form, see infr. G. USAG[Refs 5th c.BC+]

I. as the negative of single words,

II. as the negative of the sentence.

I. οὐ adhering to single words so as to form a quasi-compound with them:—with Verbs: οὐ δίδωμι withhold, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐκ εἰῶ prevent, [Refs]; οὐκ ἐθέλω refuse, [Refs]; οὔ φημι deny, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; but sometimes οὐ is retained, εἰ δ᾽ ἂν.. οὐκ ἐθέλωσιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐάντε.. οὐ (variant{μή}) φῆτε ἐάντε φῆτε [Refs 8th c.BC+] —On the use of οὐ in contrasts, see below [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

οὐ

ou

ouk ook, and (before an aspirate)

ouch ookh

a primary word; the absolute negative (compare 3361) adverb; no or

not:--+ long, nay, neither, never, no (X man), none, (can-)not, +

nothing, + special, un(-worthy), when, + without, + yet but. See also

3364, 3372.

see GREEK for 3361

see GREEK for 3364

see GREEK for 3372

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

οὐ

Neg.prt.

no, not

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

οὐ ou 1x

negative adverb, originally the gen. of ὅς, spelled οὐκ if followed by a word beginning with a vowel and a smooth breathing, οὐχ if followed by a vowel and rough breathing, not, no, Mt. 5:37; 12:43; 23:37; for the peculiarities of its usage (especially as distinct from μή) consult a grammar

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Particle-N — Particle · negative
particle — a small word colouring the clause; it does not decline.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PRT-N PaRTicle, disjunctive particle Negative

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
82%not
not82% · 1383×certainly6% · 96×surely4% · 70×no longer3% · 50×no2% · 39×other renderings3% · 51×

1,689 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 17 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial82%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,622 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
εἰμίI am, existἐγώαὐτός
ὅς
ἐγώθερίζωI reap, gatherδέbut, on the othe
ὅτιthat, since, because
σύαὐτόςἐγώ
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἐνἐπί
σύ
λέγωI say, speakγάρforὅς
οὐnot1622×
what comes after →
εἰμίI am, exist
ἐκArticle theἐγώ
μήNeg
παρέρχομαιI pass byεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inπίνωI drink, imbibe
οἶδαI know, remember
ὅτιthat, since, becArticle theτίςIrg
γάρfor
εἰμίI am, existθέλωI will, wish, deArticle the
δύναμαιI am powerful, am ab
ἔρχομαιI come, goσῴζωI save, healArticle the

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceοὐ · 1,622× in the New Testament
John Matthew Luke 1 Corinthians Romans Mark Acts 2 Corinthians Revelation Hebrews 1 John Galatians

8 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 6c. AD 40

ὡς γὰρ τῶν κολοσσιαίων μεγεθῶν τὰς ἐμφάσεις καὶ ἡ βραχυτάτη σφραγὶς τυπωθεῖσα δέχεται, οὕτως τάχα που καὶ τὰ τῆς ἀναγραφείσης ἐν τοῖς νόμοις κοσμοποιίας ὑπερβάλλοντα κάλλη καὶ ταῖς μαρμαρυγαῖς τὰς τῶν ἐντυγχανόντων ψυχὰς ἐπισκιάζοντα βραχυτέροις…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.11c. AD 75–95

ὁ δὲ τῶν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἀρχιερέων οὐδενὸς ἀρετῇ δεύτερος Ἐλεάζαρος τῷ προειρημένῳ βασιλεῖ ταύτης ἀπολαῦσαι τῆς ὠφελείας οὐκ ἐφθόνησε πάντως ἀντειπὼν ἄν, εἰ μὴ πάτριον ἦν ἡμῖν τὸ μηδὲν ἔχειν τῶν καλῶν ἀπόρρητον.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.8c. AD 100

ἐγὼ δὲ οὐχ ὡς διδάσκαλος, ἀλλ̓ ὧς εἰς ἐξ ὑμῶν ὑποδείξω ὀλίγα, δἰ ὧν ἐν τοῖς παροῦσιν εὐφρανθήσεσθε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD

δὲ γενόμεναι κατὰ τὸ ἀναγκαῖον κληρονομήσασαι ταξάμεναι τὰ καθήκοντα τέλη θεᾶι Βερενίκηι κυριεύομεν. ὅθεν οὐκ ἀποδιδόντων τὰ ἡμέτερα ἐπεδώκαμεν ἐν τῶι λ ἔτει προσανγελίαν Ἡρακλείδει γενομένωι ἀρχιφυλακίτηι τοῦ Παθυρίτου

C.Erbstreit16Diospolis Magna (Theben)135 BC

ι ἀρουρῶν πρόκτησιν … ένου αὐτὸν ἐν συνεδρίωι καὶ συγχώρησιν … ειν, ἐν ἧι οὐκ εὐδοκεῖ ὁ πατήρ. ὅθεν καταβεβραβευμένοι … ήρου συνεριου ἀξιοῦμεν, ἐὰν φαίνηται, συντάξαι γράψαι, οἷς

P.Adl. 2Pathyris125 BC

ὠνῆς ἐν πίστει διὰ τῶν περὶ τὸν Πανεβχοῦνιν ἐκτελειωθεῖσαν τῶι … ἔτει ἀντὶ ὀφειλημάτων, οὐκ ἐπελευσομένους τὸν Πανερέα καὶ τὴν Σενενοῦπιν περὶ ὀφειλημάτων μηδὲ περὶ ἄλλου μηδενός. ταῦτα δὲ

Inasmuch as we have heard that some from us went out troubled you by words upsetting the minds of you saying to be circumcised and to keep the law to whom not we had given instructions,
διεστειλάμεθα,diastellō we had given instructions, G1291 Verb · aorist · middle · indicative · first person · plural
7× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Acts as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means to give orders or commands, like when Jesus told his disciples not to tell anyone about his miracles in Matthew 16:20. It can also mean to set something apart or distinguish it. In the Bible, it is used to describe God's commands to his people.
Tyndale gloss
to give orders
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

διαστέλλω is built from the prefix διά and a root meaning to set apart. It covers a range of meanings including to divide, distinguish, and give orders or commands. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts where instructions are given, such as in Acts 15:24 and Hebrews 12:20. The lexicons agree on its general meanings, but some entries emphasize different nuances, such as the distinction between commanding and separating.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δια-στέλλω

[in LXX for בּדל hi. (De 10:8, al.), זהר hi. (Ez 3:18, 19, al.), and 19 other words]

to divide, distinguish, define.

to command, charge expressly: pass., τὸ διαστελλόμενον, He 12:20. Mid., in late Gk. with same sense (so Ez, l.c.; et al. in LXX; MM, s.v.); a. dat. pers., Mk 8:15, Ac 15:24; seq. ἵνα, Mt 16:20, Mk 5:43 7:36 9:9.†

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

διαστέλλω. The verb is common = ‘enjoin, give instructions to,” P Hal 1. 7° (B.c. 232) ΠΊ]τολεμαίωι δὲ διά[σήτειλαι, εἴπερ μὴ τὸν βυβλιαφόρον καὶ τὸν ἔφοδον ἐκπέπει[κα]ς, δε ρῖνα instructions to Ptolemaeus, in case you have not persuaded the letter-carrier and the post-controller,” P Par 2655 (B.C. 163-2) (= Selections, p. 16) ἡμῶν δὲ τοῖς δέουσι θλιβομένων καὶ ᾿Αχομάρρῃ μὲν τῷ ἐπιστάτῃ τοῦ ἱεροῦ πλεονάκι διεστάλμεθα ἀποδιδόναι ἡμῖν, “᾿ ᾿ς σ᾽ e. g. when being crushed by our wants, we often made representations we were even to Achomarres the supervisor of the temple to give us (our rights),” 26. 634-19 (B.c, 165) διεστάλμεθα τοῖς ἄλλοις ἐπιμεληταῖς Kal ὑποδιοικηταῖς ταὐτά, etc. In P Rein 7*°(?B.c. 141) διασταλέντος, ‘it having been ordered ” in the contract (ovpBodaler), is followed by the acc. and the infin. : in the NT we have the equivalent ἵνα construction. P Lond 4417 (n.c. 161)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

διαστέλλω (diastellō) — to give orders.

διαστέλλω,

put asunder, expand, separate, συνεσταλμένα δ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δ. τι ταῖς ὄνυξι to tear it open, [Refs 1st c.AD+]:—passive, to be dilated, of the lungs or heart, [Refs 4th c.BC+]being dispersed, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; διασταλήτω πᾶσα σκοτία let all darkness be dispelled, [Refs]

2. divide, δίχα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; distinguish, τοὺς Τρῶας τῶν Δαρδάνων [Refs 8th c.BC+]

2. b define precisely, τὰ λεγόμενα [Refs 5th c.BC+]; intransitive, ὅρασις διαστέλλουσα distinct vision, [LXX]; also, to be distinctive, opposed to ἀπόλυτον εἶναι, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]:—middle, δ. περί τινος [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, διεσταλμένος definite, determinate, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

διαστέλλω

diastellomai

middle voice from 1223 and 4724; to set (oneself) apart (figuratively,

distinguish), i.e. (by implication) to enjoin:--charge, that which was

(give) commanded(-ment).

see GREEK for 1223

see GREEK for 4724

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

διαστέλλομαι

v.

I give a commission, order

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

διαστέλλω diastellō 8x

to determine, issue a decision; to state or explain distinctly and accurately; hence, to admonish, direct, charge, command, Acts 15:24; Heb. 12:20; when followed by a negative clause, to interdict, prohibit, Mt. 16:30; Mk. 5:43

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-AMI-1P — Verb · aorist · middle · indicative · first person · plural
aorist middle indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-AMI-1P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Middle Mood: Indicative Person: first Number: Plural

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
38%he instructed
he instructed38% · 3×we had given instructions13% · 1×being commanded13% · 1×he ordered13% · 1×instructing13% · 1×he was instructing13% · 1×

8 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
verb100%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 7 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτός
δέbut, on the othe
ὄροςa mountain
Article the
οὐNeg
ὅς
Article the
γάρfor
διαστέλλωwe had given instructions,
what comes after →
αὐτός
ἵναin order that, sπολύςmuch, many, ofteμᾶλλονmore, rather
κἄνCond
θηρίονa wild beast, an

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδιαστέλλω · 7× in the New Testament
Mark Acts Hebrews
Across the New Testament3 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 33 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Tor. 9Theben120 BC

αὐτῆς δηλούμενα, ἧς καὶ παραναγνωσθείσης καὶ τοῦ Πετενεφώτου ἀντιτιθέναι τι πρὸς ταῦτα μὴ δυναμένου διεστειλάμεθα μηθὲν ἔτι τοιοῦτο ἐπιχειρεῖν διαπράσσεσθαι, ἐμμένειν δʼ ἐν οἷς ἑκόντες πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς συγκεχωρήκασι, ἐφʼ

Tyche 34 (2019), p. 40EgyptAD 133–AD 137

1 Μάρκος Πετρώνιος Μαμερτεῖνος … ἔπαρχος Αἰγύπτου λέγει … α … ε. … διεστείλατο διὰ βιβλιδι … … εν … ων γρα … ἀναφερομεν … … … πι

P.Lond. 3 p. 132-133 no. 908Hermopolis (?)AD 139

ὀνόματι τῆς γυναικὸς αὐτοῦ Ἑρμιόνης καὶ δέον αὐτὸν ἀποδοῦναι, συνεργῶν τῆι γυναικὶ Ἀφροδίσιος Ἀμμωνίου διεστείλατό μοι ὑπόμνημα ὡς ἐκ

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate